quadramed cpr insurance payor profile table reference€¦ · quadramed® cpr insurance payor...
Post on 26-Jul-2020
0 Views
Preview:
TRANSCRIPT
QuadraMed® CPRInsurance Payor Profile
Table Reference
Client Support
Government Program Support
WarningThe laboratory information system module of the QuadraMed CPR (QCPR) product is not designed for, nor is it intended for use in, a blood banking establishment. QuadraMed does not support, and disclaims any liability for, any use of the QCPR product for such purpose. This means that the intended use of QCPR does not include any blood banking functions whatsoever, which functions include by way of example, but are in no way limited to, the following:
Documentation – Including pre-transfusion testing (i.e., readings), outcome of testing (i.e., interpretations), transfusion of blood products, computer assisted evaluation of data, and unit number and blood type as they relate to any of the above documentations.
Inventory tracking units
Labels for blood products
Converting antibody/transfusion history card information
Donor processing
In no event will QuadraMed or any person or company acting on its behalf be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages, loss (including, without limitation, loss of profit), or personal injury arising from the supply or use of QCPR to perform the above mentioned or any other blood banking functions or to support a blood banking establishment, or arising from the supply or use of any accompanying hardware and written materials for the purposes of supporting the above mentioned or any other blood banking functions.
Any questions regarding the use of QCPR should be directed to QCPR Customer Support.
QuadraMed Corporation Proprietary StatementThis material constitutes proprietary and trade secret information of the QuadraMed Corporation, and shall not be disclosed to any third party, nor used by the recipient except under the terms and conditions prescribed by the QuadraMed Corporation.
The trademarks, service marks, and logos of QuadraMed Corporation and others used herein are the property of QuadraMed or their respective owners.
QuadraMed Corporation Copyright StatementThis material is also protected by Federal Copyright Law and is not to be copied or reproduced in any form, using any medium, without the prior written authorization of the QuadraMed Corporation. However, the QuadraMed Corporation allows the printing of the Adobe Acrobat PDF files for the purposes of client training and reference.
Contents copyright © 2011 QuadraMed Corporation. All rights reserved.
Phone: 877.823.7263
E-Mail: ClientSupport@QuadraMed.com
Technical Support:
Phone: 800.257.0512
E-Mail: Gov-TechSupport@QuadraMed.com
Application Training Support:
Phone: 800.257.0512
E-Mail: Gov-AppSupport@QuadraMed.com
Software and PDFs of guides and other documentation are available for download on the client support website. CDs and printed materials are available for purchase. See http://www.quadramed.com/customer_service for more information.
QuadraMed Corporation iii
Revision List
The following list provides the most current revision number and date for each chapter in this manual.
CHAPTERREVISION NUMBER
DATE
01 - Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt(“ipp”) 5.5.8 6/93
02 - Address Data Element 5.4.10 1/93
03 - Assignment of Benefits Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
04 - Authorization Approved Length of Stay Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
05 - Authorization Date/Time of Date Element 5.4.0 11/92
06 - Authorization Person Talked To Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
07 - Authorization Source Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
08 - Authorization Status Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
09 - Comment Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
10 - Copay Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
11 - Date 1 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
12 - Date 2 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
13 - Date 3 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
14 - Date 4 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
15 - Dialysis Provider Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
16 - Dialysis Type Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
17- Effective Date 1 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
18 - Effective Date 2 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
19 - Effective Date 3 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
iv QuadraMed Corporation
20 - Expiration Date Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
21 - Explanation Code Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
22 - Financial Class Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
23 - Formatted Entry 1 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
24 - Formatted Entry 2 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
25 - Formatted Entry 3 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
26 - Formatted Entry 4 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
27 - Formatted Entry 5 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
28 - Formatted Entry 6 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
29 - Formatted Entry 7 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
30 - Formatted Entry 8 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
31 - Formatted Entry 9 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
32 - Formatted Entry 10 Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
33 - Free-Text Insurance/Payor Name Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
34 - Generic Choose Data Element 5.5.4 5/93
35 - Generic Date/Time Data Element 5.5.4 5/93
36 - Generic Employee Name Data Element 5.5.8 6/93
37 - Generic Formatted Entry Data Element 5.5.8 6/93
38- Generic Free-Text Data Element 5.5.8 6/93
39 - Generic Hard-Coded Select Screen Data Element 5.5.8 6/93
40 - Generic Multimedia Data Element 4.3.0 7/05
41 - Generic Name Data Element 5.5.8 6/93
42 - Generic Other Facility Data Element 5.7.22 7/94
43 - Generic Selection Screen/Tree Data Element 5.5.8 6/93
44 - Generic Table Selection Data Element 5.7.22 7/94
45 - Generic Telephone Data Element 5.5.8 6/93
46 - Group Number Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
47 - Insurance Verified Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
48 - Military Base Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
CHAPTERREVISION NUMBER
DATE
QuadraMed Corporation v
49 - Military Branch of Service Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
50 - Military Rank Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
51 - Military Reason Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
52 - Military Status Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
53 - Other Facility Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
54 - Other Facility Stay End Date Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
55 - Other Facility Stay Start Date Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
56 - Payor Number Data Element 5.7.22 7/94
57 - Plan Number Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
58 - Pre-Auth Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
59 - Pre-Auth Number Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
60 - Pre-Auth Second Opinion Flag Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
61 - Proration Plan Number Data Element 5.5.4 5/93
62 - Release of Information Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
63 - Require Verification Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
64 - Review Agency Contact Person Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
65 - Review Agency Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
66 - Secondary Numbers Data Element 5.8.22 4/95
67 - Send Verification Data Element 5.0.0 05/06
68 - Signature Date Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
69 - Subscriber Address Data Element 5.4.10 1/93
70 - Subscriber Birthdate Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
71 - Subscriber Day Telephone Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
72 - Subscriber Driver’s License Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
73 - Subscriber Employee ID Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
74 - Subscriber Employer Address Data Element 5.4.10 1/93
75 - Subscriber Employer Branch Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
76 - Subscriber Employer Comment Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
77 - Subscriber Employer Contact Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
CHAPTERREVISION NUMBER
DATE
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
vi QuadraMed Corporation
78 - Subscriber Employer Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
79 - Subscriber Employer Telephone Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
80 - Subscriber Employment Status Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
81 - Subscriber Home Telephone Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
82 - Subscriber Name Data Element 5.7.30 9/94
83 - Subscriber Occupation Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
84 - Subscriber Relationship Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
85 - Subscriber Sex Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
86 - Subscriber Social Security Number Data Element 5.4.4 12/92
87 - Telephone Data Element 5.4.0 11/92
CHAPTERREVISION NUMBER
DATE
Copyright © 2011 QuadraMed Corporation
Table of Contents
Revision List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Chapter 1 Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Table Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Table Builder Definition Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Active? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Profile Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Profile Short Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Parameter Definitions Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Screen Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Screen Driver Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4Screen Driver Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Data Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Data Element Definition Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Edit Security Expr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Display Security Expr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Allowed Security Expr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Required Expr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Chapter 2 Address Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Address Collection Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
viii QuadraMed Corporation
Chapter 3 Assignment of Benefits Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Face Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 4 Authorization Approved Length of Stay Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Chapter 5 Authorization Date/Time of Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Chapter 6 Authorization Person Talked To Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Table of Contents
QuadraMed Corporation ix
Chapter 7 Authorization Source Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Chapter 8 Authorization Status Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Chapter 9 Comment Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Chapter 10 Copay Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
x QuadraMed Corporation
Chapter 11 Date 1 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Days In Past. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Days In Future . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Chapter 12 Date 2 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Days In Past. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Days In Future . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Chapter 13 Date 3 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Days In Past. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Days In Future . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Chapter 14 Date 4 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Table of Contents
QuadraMed Corporation xi
Days In Past. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Days In Future . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Chapter 15 Dialysis Provider Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Chapter 16 Dialysis Type Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Face Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Chapter 17 Effective Date 1 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Days In Past. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Days In Future . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Chapter 18 Effective Date 2 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
xii QuadraMed Corporation
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Effective Date 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Days In Past. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Days In Future . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Chapter 19 Effective Date 3 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Days In Past. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Days In Future . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Chapter 20 Expiration Date Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Days In Past. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Days In Future . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Chapter 21 Explanation Code Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Table of Contents
QuadraMed Corporation xiii
Chapter 22 Financial Class Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Chapter 23 Formatted Entry 1 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Verification Expression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Chapter 24 Formatted Entry 2 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Verification Expression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Chapter 25 Formatted Entry 3 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
xiv QuadraMed Corporation
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Verification Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Chapter 26 Formatted Entry 4 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Verification Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Chapter 27 Formatted Entry 5 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Verification Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Chapter 28 Formatted Entry 6 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Table of Contents
QuadraMed Corporation xv
Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Verification Expression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Chapter 29 Formatted Entry 7 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Verification Expression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Chapter 30 Formatted Entry 8 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Verification Expression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Chapter 31 Formatted Entry 9 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
xvi QuadraMed Corporation
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Verification Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Chapter 32 Formatted Entry 10 Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Verification Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Chapter 33 Free-Text Insurance/Payor Name Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Chapter 34 Generic Choose Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Choose Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Storage Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Table of Contents
QuadraMed Corporation xvii
Chapter 35 Generic Date/Time Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Allow Approximate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Storage Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Chapter 36 Generic Employee Name Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Employee Type(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Storage Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Chapter 37 Generic Formatted Entry Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Check Digit Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Verification Expression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Storage Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Chapter 38 Generic Free-Text Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
xviii QuadraMed Corporation
Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Storage Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Chapter 39 Generic Hard-Coded Select Screen Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Hard-Coded Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Storage Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Chapter 40 Generic Multimedia Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Capture/Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Field Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Printing Images Using Chart Review Print Routine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Printing Images Using the HTML Printer Server and HTML Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Storage Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Multimedia Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Multimedia Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Multimedia Server Type(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Multimedia Catalogue Object(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Display Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Allow Annotation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Initial Annotation Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Multimedia Rubber Stamp(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Additional Object Data String. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Additional Generated Data String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Suppress Printing?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Image Print Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Expressions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Table of Contents
QuadraMed Corporation xix
Chapter 41 Generic Name Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Storage Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Chapter 42 Generic Other Facility Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Storage Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Address Collection Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Use Partial Name Match? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Chapter 43 Generic Selection Screen/Tree Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Screen Type/Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Window Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Multi-Select? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Allow Free-Text? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Storage Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Chapter 44 Generic Table Selection Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
xx QuadraMed Corporation
Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Selection Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Selection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Window Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Multi-Select? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Allow Free-Text? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Allow Partial Name?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Storage Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Expressions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Chapter 45 Generic Telephone Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Storage Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Chapter 46 Group Number Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Verification Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Chapter 47 Insurance Verified Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Table of Contents
QuadraMed Corporation xxi
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Face Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Chapter 48 Military Base Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Chapter 49 Military Branch of Service Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Chapter 50 Military Rank Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Chapter 51 Military Reason Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
xxii QuadraMed Corporation
Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Chapter 52 Military Status Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Chapter 53 Other Facility Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Chapter 54 Other Facility Stay End Date Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Days In Past. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Days In Future . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Chapter 55 Other Facility Stay Start Date Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Table of Contents
QuadraMed Corporation xxiii
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Days In Past. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Days In Future . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Chapter 56 Payor Number Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Chapter 57 Plan Number Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Verification Expression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Chapter 58 Pre-Auth Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
xxiv QuadraMed Corporation
Chapter 59 Pre-Auth Number Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Verification Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Chapter 60 Pre-Auth Second Opinion Flag Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Face Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Chapter 61 Proration Plan Number Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Verification Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Low Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235High Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Table of Contents
QuadraMed Corporation xxv
Chapter 62 Release of Information Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Face Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Chapter 63 Require Verification Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Face Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Chapter 64 Review Agency Contact Person Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Face Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Chapter 65 Review Agency Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
xxvi QuadraMed Corporation
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Face Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Chapter 66 Secondary Numbers Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Secondary Number Type/Secondary Number Type(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Allow Duplicate Secondary Number(s)? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Allow Edit of Secondary Number(s)? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Manual Number Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Expressions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Chapter 67 Send Verification Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Manual Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Card Reader Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Scan Insurance Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Verification Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Visit Insurance Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Streamlined Newborn Admission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Visit Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Visit Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Visit Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Timeout Management Queue(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Verification Start Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Card Reader Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Field Delimiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Table of Contents
QuadraMed Corporation xxvii
Card Capture Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Card Reader Parameters Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Ins/Payor DE Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Card Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Override Previous Data? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Manual Start Information Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Format(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Display Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Required Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Chapter 68 Signature Date Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Chapter 69 Subscriber Address Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Address Collection Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Street Address Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275City Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275County Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275State Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Country Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Mailing Code Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Chapter 70 Subscriber Birthdate Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
xxviii QuadraMed Corporation
Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Chapter 71 Subscriber Day Telephone Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Chapter 72 Subscriber Driver's License Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Chapter 73 Subscriber Employee ID Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Display Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Display Format(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Display Maximum Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Verification Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Chapter 74 Subscriber Employer Address Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Table of Contents
QuadraMed Corporation xxix
Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Address Collection Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Chapter 75 Subscriber Employer Branch Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Chapter 76 Subscriber Employer Comment Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Chapter 77 Subscriber Employer Contact Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Chapter 78 Subscriber Employer Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
xxx QuadraMed Corporation
Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Address Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Chapter 79 Subscriber Employer Telephone Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Chapter 80 Subscriber Employment Status Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Chapter 81 Subscriber Home Telephone Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Chapter 82 Subscriber Name Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Table of Contents
QuadraMed Corporation xxxi
Guarantor Modifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Guarantor Modifier Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Same As Data To Exclude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Chapter 83 Subscriber Occupation Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Chapter 84 Subscriber Relationship Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Chapter 85 Subscriber Sex Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Chapter 86 Subscriber Social Security Number Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Data Element Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
xxxii QuadraMed Corporation
Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Chapter 87 Telephone Data Element
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Data Element Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Constants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Message Modifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Index of Selected Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
QuadraMed Corporation 1
Chapter 1
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
OverviewThe Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), is used to define the insurance screen sequences that collects insurance-specific information. A different screen sequence can be defined for each insurance/payor.
Table AttributesTable Relationship Links TO Menu Functions FROM ^rt("ipp"):
None
Links TO other Tables FROM ^rt("ipp"):Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip")
Links FROM other Tables TO ^rt("ipp"):None
Facility Specific? No
Database Standards The Database Standards used to build/validate this table are located in Registration/Visit Screens Database Standards in the Database Standards Table Reference.
Table Organization The Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), is a multiple-level screen driver table. It is composed of the following levels:
Profile Name
Parameter Definitions
Screen Driver
Once the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp") is accessed, the System prompts for a partial name. After a partial name is entered, the System displays a list of matching Insurance/Payor Profile Options, if any. The following processing options are available:
EditAddDelete
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
2 QuadraMed Corporation
Selecting an option to edit displays the information for the Profile Name level. This information can be edited by choosing (E) Edit or the Screen Driver level can be accessed by pressing the ENTER key.
When adding a new option, the information for the Profile Name level must be defined and accepted before the Screen Driver level can be accessed.
After the Profile Name level is defined, the System displays the list of previously defined Screen Sequence Options, if any. The following processing options are available:
EditBuildDeleteInsertMove
Selecting an option to edit causes the System to display the Screen Driver level. The Parameter Definitions level can be accessed by choosing the param processing option from the Screen Driver level. When inserting a new option, the Parameter Definitions level must be defined and accepted before the Screen Driver level can be accessed. The following processing options are available:
EditColorDeleteHeadingInsertMoveParam
For a complete description of rebuilding screens, see the screen drivers chapter in the Introduction to QuadraMed® CPR Tables manual.
The usual Edit, Add, and Delete processing options are available.
Department Usage Admitting/RegistrationAdmitting/registration uses these screens to enter/display all insurance/payor (or third party payor) information for a patient.
Admitting/registration can define generic fields to capture specialized information (Example: over income amounts for Medicaid eligibility).
Utilization ManagementUtilization management uses these screens to enter/display pre-authorization information.
Chapter 1 Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
QuadraMed Corporation 3
Table Builder Definition ScreenThe following fields display on the Table Builder Definitions Screen for the Profile Name level:
Active?
Purpose Defines whether this option displays for selection in menu functions and in other tables.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to yes
System Use Yes – Indicates the option is available. The option displays for selection in menu functions and in other tables.
No – Indicates the option is inactive. The option displays in dim text in the table and does not display for selection in menu functions or other tables.
Impact ofChange
Edits and additions are effective immediately.
Profile Name
Purpose Defines the name of the screen sequence.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this name for selection in the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip"), Screen Profile field.
Impact ofChange
Edits and additions are effective immediately.
Profile Short Name
Purpose Defines the screen sequence name in abbreviated terms.
Input Free-text
10 character limit
Required
System Use Currently not used
Impact ofChange
None
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
4 QuadraMed Corporation
Parameter Definitions LevelThe following fields display on the Table Builder Definitions Screen for the Parameter Definitions level:
Screen Driver TypeDefines whether the screen driver is a vertical or horizontal screen driver. The System defaults to horizontal. This field cannot be edited.
Screen Driver LevelThis level is a horizontal screen driver.
Data ElementsThe following data elements can be inserted on any Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Screen Driver:
Address
Assignment of Benefits
Authorization Approved Length of Stay
Authorization Date/Time of
Authorization Person Talked To
Authorization Source
Authorization Status
Comment
Copay
Screen Name
Purpose Defines the name of the screen.
Input Free-text
50 character limit
Required
System Use Displays this screen name for selection when defining insurance information during visit processing.
Impact ofChange
Edits and additions are effective immediately.
Chapter 1 Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
QuadraMed Corporation 5
Date 1
Date 2
Date 3
Date 4
Dialysis Provider
Dialysis Type
Effective Date 1
Effective Date 2
Effective Date 3
Expiration Date
Explanation Code
Financial Class
Formatted Entry 1
Formatted Entry 10
Formatted Entry 2
Formatted Entry 3
Formatted Entry 4
Formatted Entry 5
Formatted Entry 6
Formatted Entry 7
Formatted Entry 8
Formatted Entry 9
Free-Text Insurance/Payor Name
Generic Choose
Generic Date/Time
Generic Employee Name
Generic Formatted Entry
Generic Free-Text
Generic Hard-Coded Select Screen
Generic Multimedia
Generic Other Facility
Generic Selection Screen/Tree
Generic Table Selection
Generic Telephone
Group Number
Insurance Verified
Military Base
Military Branch of Service
Military Rank
Military Reason
Military Status
Other Facility
Other Facility Stay End Date
Other Facility Stay Start Date
Payor Number
Plan Number
Pre-Auth
Pre-Auth Number
Pre-Auth Second Opinion Flag
Proration Plan Number
Release of Information
Require Verification
Review Agency
Review Agency Contact Person
Secondary Numbers
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
6 QuadraMed Corporation
Data Element Definition ScreenThe following fields display on all the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Data Element Definition Screens:
Send Verification
Signature Date
Subscriber Address
Subscriber Birthdate
Subscriber Day Telephone
Subscriber Driver's License
Subscriber Employee ID
Subscriber Employer
Subscriber Employer Address
Subscriber Employer Branch
Subscriber Employer Comment
Subscriber Employer Contact
Subscriber Employer Telephone
Subscriber Employment Status
Subscriber Home Telephone
Subscriber Name
Subscriber Occupation
Subscriber Relationship
Subscriber Sex
Subscriber Social Security Number
Telephone
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Field Name Identifies the name of the field that displays on the screen driver.
Data Width Defines the width of the line(s) in which the entered data displays.
# Lines Defines the number of lines in which the data displays.
Archive? Defines whether data is stored in an archive (audit trail) event.
Required? Defines whether the field is required during data entry. Whether a field is required can also be defined in a data element dependency.
Edit Only? Defines whether the data element field is skipped in the fill and blank fill modes.
Constants Defines the specification of processing parameters for the data element field being defined, such as input limits, formats, and the transaction line. The fields that display are unique to each data element.
Chapter 1 Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
QuadraMed Corporation 7
ExpressionsThe following fields display when the Expressions field is accessed:
Edit Security Expr
Purpose Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field can be edited by the user. This security check is in addition to any hard-coded checks in the data element.
Input Report Writer expression editor
This field is defined with a boolean (true/false) expression.
System Use Evaluates the expression defined in this field when the screen driver is accessed. The expression also is evaluated any time a field referenced in the expression is edited.
When the expression evaluates as true, the data element field can be edited on the user side.
In QuadraMed Computerized Patient Records (QuadraMed CPR), (character mode), when the expression evaluates as false, the selection number and data for the data element field are starred out (***), making the field inaccessible.
In Ultiview or Javaview, when the expression evaluates as false, the option number button displays in dim text, indicating the option is not accessible.
Impact of Change
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Security Expr
Purpose Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field can be accessed on the screen driver on the user side. This security check is in addition to any hard-coded display checks in the data element.
Input Report Writer expression editor
This field is defined with a boolean (true/false) expression.
System Use Evaluates the expression defined in this field when the screen driver is accessed. The expression also is evaluated any time a field referenced in the expression is edited.
When the expression evaluates as true, the data element field displays on the user side.
In QuadraMed CPR (character mode), when the expression evaluates as false, the selection number and data area for the data element field are starred out (***), making the field inaccessible.
In Ultiview or Javaview, when the expression evaluates as false, the option number button displays in dim text, indicating the option is not accessible.
Impact of Change
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
8 QuadraMed Corporation
Allowed Security Expr
Purpose Defines an expression that determines whether data can be entered into the data element field, and whether previously defined data is cleared when data cannot be entered. When allowed security fails, the field cannot be accessed and the System clears any data defined in the field.
Input Report Writer expression editor
This subfield is defined with a boolean (true/false) expression
System Use Evaluates the expression defined in this subfield when the screen driver is accessed. The expression is also evaluated any time a field referenced in the expression is edited.
When the expression evaluates as true, data can be entered into the data element field, and the System does not clear the data if, subsequently, the field cannot be accessed. Therefore, if any data is changed which allows the field to be accessed, the previously defined data redisplays in the data element field.
When the expression evaluates as false, data cannot be entered into the data element field, and the System clears the data if, subsequently, the field cannot be accessed. Therefore, if any data is changed which allows the field to be accessed, either the default value displays, if defined, or the field displays empty.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Required Expr
Purpose Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field is required. This status is in addition to any hard-coded checks in the data element.
Input Report Writer expression editor
System Use Evaluates the expression defined in this field when the screen driver is accessed. The expression also is evaluated any time a field referenced in the expression is edited.
This field is defined with an expression that results in one of the following values:
0 (not required) – Indicates the data element field is not required. The screen driver can be accepted as complete without entering data into the data element field.
1 (accept required) – Indicates the data element field is accept required. The screen driver cannot be accepted as complete or partial without entering data into the data element field. The selection number for an accept required field displays in a bright box to indicate the field must be defined.
2 (process required) – Indicates the data element field is process required. The screen driver can be accepted as partial, but not complete, without entering data into the data element field. The selection number for a process required field displays in a bright box to indicate the field must be defined.
Chapter 1 Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
QuadraMed Corporation 9
If the Data Element Definition Screen, Required? field can be defined for the data element as well as this field, the System uses the most restrictive definition. For example, if the Required? field is defined as process required and this expression indicates the field is not required (that is, a value of 0), the field is process required when the screen driver is accessed on the user side.
Impact of Change
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Required Expr (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
10 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 11
Chapter 2
Address Data Element
OverviewThe Address data element is used to create a field that allows the address of the insurance/payor to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Address data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Address data element:
Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad")
Variations The Address data element consists of the following variations:
Display Only
This variation indicates the address is a display only field. The information that displays cannot be edited. The following field displays for the Display Only variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Address Collection ScreenEntered - City/State Only
This variation indicates the System only defaults the city and state information. When this variation is being defined, the System creates two data element fields on the screen driver, one for the city and another for the state. The following field displays for the Entered - City/State Only variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
12 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Address data element is accessed, the System automatically defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip"), Address field. Depending on the variation selected, this information can be viewed, accepted, or edited.
ConstantsThe following fields can display when the Constants field is accessed:
Entered - Standard
This variation displays the Address Collection Screen for definition when the field created from this data element is accessed during insurance processing. The following fields display for the Entered - Standard variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierAddress Collection ScreenEntered - State Only
This variation indicates the System only defaults the state information. There are no constants defined for this variation.
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 2 Address Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 13
Address Collection Screen
Purpose Defines the Address Collection Screen that displays to collect the address on the user's side.
Input Single selection
Links from the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad")
System Use Displays this Address Collection Screen when the field created from this data element is selected during insurance processing.
When a screen is not defined in this field, the System displays the screen defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Address Collection Driver field.
For a complete description of address screens, see Chapter 1, Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad") in the Address Collection Driver Table Reference.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
14 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 15
Chapter 3
Assignment of Benefits Data Element
OverviewThe Assignment of Benefits data element is used to create a field that defines whether the patient has authorized the insurance company to pay the hospital for services rendered (that is, assign the benefits to the hospital).
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Address data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Address data element:
Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs")
Variations The Assignment of Benefits data element consists of the following variations:
Choose – This variation indicates to the System that the options display in the transaction line defined in the Prompt Constants field. The following fields display for the Choose variation when the Constants field is accessed:
PromptFace SheetValuesScreen – This variation indicates to the System that the options display as a selection on a screen. The following fields display for the Screen variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierFace SheetDisplay Text
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
16 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Assignment of Benefits data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, either prompts for a status to be chosen or displays a list of options and prompts for one to be selected.
The information that defaults into this data element field is a result of the assignment of benefits calculation.
ConstantsThe following fields can display when the Constants field is accessed:
Prompt
Purpose Defines the transaction line that displays when this data element is selected during insurance processing.
Input Free-text beginning with the verb Choose.
Each choose value must be included in the prompt. For example, if the following values are defined:
The transaction line (prompt) should be defined as:
Choose no assignment(N) or assignment(Y)
System Use Displays this transaction line when the data element is selected during insurance processing
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Face Sheet
Purpose Defines the face sheet data element into which information is passed.
Input Partial name match
Single selection
Links from the Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs"), Categories/Data Elements subfile
System Use Stores this value in the face sheet data element, replacing the previously stored results.
VALUE DISPLAY TEXT MEANING
N No assignment no assignment of benefits
Y Assignment assignment of benefits
Chapter 3 Assignment of Benefits Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 17
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Values
Purpose Defines the character values that are accepted as input.
Input Value – Defines an allowable choice. Only one alphabetic character can be entered, and each value must have a unique letter. The System automatically capitalizes lower case letters.
Display text – Defines the text associated with the defined value. This is a free-text entry.
Meaning – Hard-coded text associated with the value and display text.
System Use When a value is chosen from the transaction line, the System displays the defined display text for that value.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Text
Purpose Defines the character values that are accepted as input.
Input Display text – Defines the text that displays for selection. This is a free-text entry.
Meaning – Hard-coded text associated with the display text.
(M) Move
Face Sheet (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
18 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When a value is selected from the screen, the System displays the information defined as the display text for that value.
(M) Move – Allows the order of the display text to be changed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Text (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 19
Chapter 4
Authorization Approved Length of Stay Data Element
OverviewThe Authorization Approved Length of Stay data element is used to create an insurance field that allows the number of days (length of stay) that has been approved for the visit by the patient's insurance company to be defined.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Authorization Approved Length of Stay data element is accessed, the System prompts for a length of stay to be entered. The System only accepts the entry of an integer.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Authorization Approved Length of Stay data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Authorization Approved Length of Stay data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
20 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 21
Chapter 5
Authorization Date/Time of Data Element
OverviewThe Authorization Date/Time of data element is used to create a field that allows the entry of the date or date and time that pre-authorization was obtained for the patient's visit.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Authorization Date/Time of data element is accessed, the QuadraMed CPR System prompts for a date or date/time to be entered. The System allows the date to be entered in the following ways:
t (today) – Displays the current System date.
t +/- (offset) – Displays the current System date plus/minus a valid offset. QuadraMed CPR accepts the following offsets:
number(n) – Indicates the offset is a number of days (Example: t-1 is yesterday, based on the current System date).
nw – Indicates the offset is a number of weeks (Example: t-3w is 3 weeks ago).
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Authorization Date/Time of data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Authorization Date/Time of data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
22 QuadraMed Corporation
nm – Indicates the offset is a number of months (Example: If today is 9 August 90, then t-3m is May 1990).
ny – Indicates the offset is a number of years (Example: If today is 9 August 89, then t-2y is 1987).
The format in which the System accepts dates is determined by the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters level, Date Parsing field. The Date Parsing Options, along with their defined formats, are as follows:
U.S.A.
Month-Day-Year in one of the following formats:
mm-dd-yy
mm/dd/yy
dd mmm yy
dd mmm yyyy
Month-Year in one of the following formats:
mm/yy
mm-yy
mmm yyyy
Year as yyyy
When a month is defined with a three character format (that is, mmm), the input is alphabetic characters. When the month is defined with a two-character format (that is, mm), the input is numeric.
Canada – Canadian parsing interprets the first number of an unformatted date string as a day rather than as a month.
International – Currently not used.
QuadraMed CPR allows a date and time to be entered in the following ways:
n (now) – Current System date and time.
t (today) – Current System date. A t can be entered by itself or followed by a time (Example: t 0700 is today at 0700).
Date and time – All the previously identified date formats are acceptable with the following time formats:
As a 24-hour time (Example: 1300 for 1:00 pm)
As hh:mm am/pm (Example: 11:15 pm)
Chapter 5 Authorization Date/Time of Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 23
n - (offset) – Current System date minus an allowed offset. QuadraMed CPR accepts the following offsets:
number (n) – Indicates the offset is a number of minutes (Example: n-30 is 30 minutes ago).
nh – Indicates the offset is a number of hours (Example: n-2h is 2 hours ago).
The System evaluates each entered time for the proper format. When an unrecognized format is entered, the System displays an error message.
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
24 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 25
Chapter 6
Authorization Person Talked To Data Element
OverviewThe Authorization Person Talked To data element is used to create an insurance field that allows the name of the person representing the third party payor, who authorized the patient's visit, to be entered.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Authorization Person Talked To data element is accessed, the System prompts for a name to be entered. This is a free-text field.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Authorization Person Talked To data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Authorization Person Talked To data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
26 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 27
Chapter 7
Authorization Source Data Element
OverviewThe Authorization Source data element is used to create a field that defines the source from which the pre-authorization was given.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Authorization Source data element is accessed, the System displays a list of Pre-Authorization Source Options and prompts for one to be selected, or for free-text to be entered. Pre-Authorization Source Options are defined in the Pre-Authorization Source Table, ^rt("pa").
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Authorization Source data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Authorization Source data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
28 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 29
Chapter 8
Authorization Status Data Element
OverviewThe Authorization Status data element is used to create a field that defines the current status of pre-authorization for an insurance.Users who perform pre-authorization processing update the status of their work during processing.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Authorization Status data element is accessed, the System displays a list of Status Options and prompts for one to be selected. The System defaults the pre-authorization status of unprocessed. This option can be accepted when the pre-authorization verification process has not started or changed to partial or complete. These options are hard-coded.
When the pre-authorization status is changed to partial or complete, the System displays the status on the Insurance Summary Screen, in parentheses, next to the insurance's pre-authorization requirement.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Authorization Status data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Authorization Status data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
30 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 31
Chapter 9
Comment Data Element
OverviewThe Comment data element is used to create a field that allows free-text information about the insurance to be entered.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Comment data element is accessed, the System prompts for information to be entered.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Comment data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Comment data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
32 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 33
Chapter 10
Copay Data Element
OverviewThe Copay data element is used to create an insurance field that defines the subscriber's copayment information. This field can be used to define the specific amount of the copayment (Example: $5.00), the percentage amount of the copayment (Example: 30 %), or that the patient does not have a copayment (Example: None or No copayment).
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Copay data element is accessed, the System prompts for the copayment information to be entered. This is a free-text field.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Copay data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Copay data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
34 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 35
Chapter 11
Date 1 Data Element
OverviewThe Date 1 data element is used to create an insurance field that collects a date.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Date 1 data element is accessed, the System prompts for a date to be entered. The System accepts the following date formats:
t (today) – Displays the current System date.
t +/- offset – Displays the current System date plus or minus a valid offset. The System accepts the following offsets:
(n) number – Indicates the offset is a number of days, indicated by n. For example, t+1 is tomorrow and t-1 is yesterday.
nw – Indicates the offset is a number of weeks, indicated by n. For example, t+3w is three weeks or 21 days in the future.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Date 1 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Date 1 data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
36 QuadraMed Corporation
nm – Indicates the offset is a number of months, indicated by n. When the date offset is a month, only the month and year display. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+3m is March 1992.
ny – Indicates the offset is a number of years, indicated by n. When the offset is a year, only the year displays. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+2y is 1993.
Acceptable date formats are determined by the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters level, Date Parsing field. Depending on the Date Parsing Option selected, the System accepts the date in the following formats:
U.S.A.
The month (m), day (d), and year (y) can be defined in the following formats:
mm-dd-yy
mm/dd/yy
dd mmm yy
dd mmm yyyy
The month and year can be defined in the following formats:
mm/yy
mm-yy
mmm yyyy
The year can be defined as yyyy.
When a month is defined in a three character format (that is, mmm), the input is alphabetic characters. When the month is defined in a two character format (that is, mm), the input is numeric.
Canada – Canadian date parsing interprets the first number of an unformatted date string as a day rather than a month.
International – Currently not used.
Chapter 11 Date 1 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 37
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Past
Purpose Defines the number of days, in the past, the System accepts for a date.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
System Use When a past date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is previous to the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date prior to 29 October 1992.
No limit – Indicates that any past date is accepted.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future
Purpose Defines the number of days, in the future, the System accepts for a date.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
38 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When a future date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is greater than the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date greater than (that is, into the future) 02 November 1992.
No limit – Indicates that any future date is accepted.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 39
Chapter 12
Date 2 Data Element
OverviewThe Date 2 data element is used to create an insurance field that collects a date.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Date 2 data element is accessed, the System prompts for a date to be entered. The System accepts the following date formats:
t (today) – Displays the current System date.
t +/- offset – Displays the current System date plus or minus a valid offset. The System accepts the following offsets:
(n) number – Indicates the offset is a number of days, indicated by n. For example, t+1 is tomorrow and t-1 is yesterday.
nw – Indicates the offset is a number of weeks, indicated by n. For example, t+3w is three weeks or 21 days in the future.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Date 2 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Date 2 data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
40 QuadraMed Corporation
nm – Indicates the offset is a number of months, indicated by n. When the date offset is a month, only the month and year display. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+3m is March 1992.
ny – Indicates the offset is a number of years, indicated by n. When the offset is a year, only the year displays. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+2y is 1993.
Acceptable date formats are determined by the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters level, Date Parsing field. Depending on the Date Parsing Option selected, the System accepts the date in the following formats:
U.S.A.
The month (m), day (d), and year (y) can be defined in the following formats:
mm-dd-yy
mm/dd/yy
dd mmm yy
dd mmm yyyy
The month and year can be defined in the following formats:
mm/yy
mm-yy
mmm yyyy
The year can be defined as yyyy.
When a month is defined in a three character format (that is, mmm), the input is alphabetic characters. When the month is defined in a two character format (that is, mm), the input is numeric.
Canada – Canadian date parsing interprets the first number of an unformatted date string as a day rather than a month.
International – Currently not used.
Chapter 12 Date 2 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 41
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Past
Purpose Defines the number of days, in the past, the System accepts for a date.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
System Use When a past date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is previous to the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date prior to 29 October 1992.
No limit – Indicates that any past date is accepted.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future
Purpose Defines the number of days, in the future, the System accepts for a date.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
42 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When a future date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is greater than the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date greater than (that is, into the future) 02 November 1992.
No limit – Indicates that any future date is accepted.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 43
Chapter 13
Date 3 Data Element
OverviewThe Date 3 data element is used to create an insurance field that collects a date.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Date 3 data element is accessed, the System prompts for a date to be entered. The System accepts the following date formats:
t (today) – Displays the current System date.
t +/- offset – Displays the current System date plus or minus a valid offset. The System accepts the following offsets:
(n) number – Indicates the offset is a number of days, indicated by n. For example, t+1 is tomorrow and t-1 is yesterday.
nw – Indicates the offset is a number of weeks, indicated by n. For example, t+3w is three weeks or 21 days in the future.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Date 3 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Date 3 data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
44 QuadraMed Corporation
nm – Indicates the offset is a number of months, indicated by n. When the date offset is a month, only the month and year display. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+3m is March 1992.
ny – Indicates the offset is a number of years, indicated by n. When the offset is a year, only the year displays. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+2y is 1993.
Acceptable date formats are determined by the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters level, Date Parsing field. Depending on the Date Parsing Option selected, the System accepts the date in the following formats:
U.S.A.
The month (m), day (d), and year (y) can be defined in the following formats:
mm-dd-yy
mm/dd/yy
dd mmm yy
dd mmm yyyy
The month and year can be defined in the following formats:
mm/yy
mm-yy
mmm yyyy
The year can be defined as yyyy.
When a month is defined in a three character format (that is, mmm), the input is alphabetic characters. When the month is defined in a two character format (that is, mm), the input is numeric.
Canada – Canadian date parsing interprets the first number of an unformatted date string as a day rather than a month.
International – Currently not used.
Chapter 13 Date 3 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 45
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Past
Purpose Defines the number of days, in the past, the System accepts for a date.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
System Use When a past date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is previous to the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date prior to 29 October 1992.
No limit – Indicates that any past date is accepted.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future
Purpose Defines the number of days, in the future, the System accepts for a date.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
46 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When a future date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is greater than the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date greater than (that is, into the future) 02 November 1992.
No limit – Indicates that any future date is accepted.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 47
Chapter 14
Date 4 Data Element
OverviewThe Date 4 data element is used to create an insurance field that collects a date.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Date 4 data element is accessed, the System prompts for a date to be entered. The System accepts the following date formats:
t (today) – Displays the current System date.
t +/- offset – Displays the current System date plus or minus a valid offset. The System accepts the following offsets:
(n) number – Indicates the offset is a number of days, indicated by n. For example, t+1 is tomorrow and t-1 is yesterday.
nw – Indicates the offset is a number of weeks, indicated by n. For example, t+3w is three weeks or 21 days in the future.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Date 4 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Date 4 data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
48 QuadraMed Corporation
nm – Indicates the offset is a number of months, indicated by n. When the date offset is a month, only the month and year display. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+3m is March 1992.
ny – Indicates the offset is a number of years, indicated by n. When the offset is a year, only the year displays. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+2y is 1993.
Acceptable date formats are determined by the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters level, Date Parsing field. Depending on the Date Parsing Option selected, the System accepts the date in the following formats:
U.S.A.
The month (m), day (d), and year (y) can be defined in the following formats:
mm-dd-yy
mm/dd/yy
dd mmm yy
dd mmm yyyy
The month and year can be defined in the following formats:
mm/yy
mm-yy
mmm yyyy
The year can be defined as yyyy.
When a month is defined in a three character format (that is, mmm), the input is alphabetic characters. When the month is defined in a two character format (that is, mm), the input is numeric.
Canada – Canadian date parsing interprets the first number of an unformatted date string as a day rather than a month.
International – Currently not used.
Chapter 14 Date 4 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 49
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Past
Purpose Defines the number of days, in the past, the System accepts for a date.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
System Use When a past date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is previous to the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date prior to 29 October 1992.
No limit – Indicates that any past date is accepted.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future
Purpose Defines the number of days, in the future, the System accepts for a date.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
50 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When a future date is entered into thisdata element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is greater than the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date greater than (that is, into the future) 02 November 1992.
No limit – Indicates that any future date is accepted.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 51
Chapter 15
Dialysis Provider Data Element
OverviewThe Dialysis Provider data element is used to create a field that defines the patient's dialysis provider facility.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Dialysis Provider data element is accessed, the System prompts for a partial name to be entered.
Once a partial name is entered, the System displays a list of matching options and prompts for one to be selected. The options that display are defined in the Other Facility Table, ^rt("of").
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Dialysis Provider data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Dialysis Provider data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
52 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 53
Chapter 16
Dialysis Type Data Element
OverviewThe Dialysis Type data element is used to create a field that defines the type of dialysis provided to the patient (that is, hemodialysis or peritoneal). This field is starred out ( ** ), making it inaccessible, until the field created from the Dialysis Type data element is defined.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Dialysis Type data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Dialysis Type data element:
Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs")
Variations The Dialysis Type data element consists of the following variations:
Choose
This variation indicates to the System that the options display in the transaction line defined in the Prompt Constants field. The following fields display for the Choose variation when the Constants field is accessed:
PromptFace SheetValuesScreen
This variation indicates to the System that the options display as a selection screen. The following fields display for the Screen variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierFace SheetDisplay Text
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
54 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Dialysis Type data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, either prompts for a type to be chosen or displays a list of options and prompts for one to be selected.
ConstantsThe following fields can display when the Constants field is accessed:
Prompt
Purpose Defines the transaction line that displays when this data element is selected during insurance processing.
Input Free-text beginning with the verb Choose.
Each choose value must be included in the prompt. For example, if the following values are defined::
The transaction line (prompt) should be defined as:
Choose hemodialysis (H) or peritoneal (P)
System Use Displays this transaction line when the data element is selected during insurance processing.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Face Sheet
Purpose Defines the face sheet data element into which information is passed.
Input Partial name match
Single selection
Links from the Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs"), Categories/Data Elements subfile
System Use Stores this value in the face sheet data element, replacing the previously stored results.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
VALUE DISPLAY TEXT MEANING
H Hemodialysis Hemodialysis
P Peritoneal Peritoneal Dialysis
Chapter 16 Dialysis Type Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 55
Values
Purpose Defines the character values that are accepted as input.
Input Value – Defines an allowable choice. Only one alphabetic character can be entered, and each value must have a unique letter. The System automatically capitalizes lower case letters.
Display Text – Defines the text associated with the defined value. This is a free-text entry.
Meaning – Hard-coded text associated with the value and display text.
System Use When a value is chosen from the transaction line, the System displays the defined display text for that value.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Text
Purpose Defines the character values that are accepted as input.
Input Display Text – Defines the text that displays for selection. This is a free-text entry.
Meaning – Hard-coded text associated with the display text.
(M) Move
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
56 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When a value is selected from the screen, the System displays the information defined as the display text for that value.
(M) Move – Allows the order of the display text to be changed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Text (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 57
Chapter 17
Effective Date 1 Data Element
OverviewThe Effective Date 1 data element is used to create a field that defines the start (effective) date of the subscriber's primary insurance coverage.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Effective Date 1 data element is accessed, the System prompts for an effective date to be entered. The System accepts the following date formats:
"t"(today) – Displays the current System date.
"t" +/- offset – Displays the current System date plus or minus a valid offset. The System accepts the following offsets:
(n) number – Indicates the offset is a number of days, indicated by n. For example, t+1 is tomorrow and t-1 is yesterday.
nw – Indicates the offset is a number of weeks, indicated by n. For example, t+3w is three weeks or 21 days in the future.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Effective Date 1 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Effective Date 1 data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
58 QuadraMed Corporation
nm – Indicates the offset is a number of months, indicated by n. When the date offset is a month, only the month and year display. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+3m is March 1992.
ny – Indicates the offset is a number of years, indicated by n. When the offset is a year, only the year displays. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+2y is 1993.
Acceptable date formats are determined by the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters level, Date Parsing field. Depending on the Date Parsing Option selected, the System accepts the date in the following formats:
U.S.A.
The month (m), day (d), and year (y) can be defined in the following formats:
mm-dd-yy
mm/dd/yy
dd mmm yy
dd mmm yyyy
The month and year can be defined in the following formats:
mm/yy
mm-yy
mmm yyyy
The year can be defined as yyyy.
When a month is defined in a three character format (that is, mmm), the input is alphabetic characters. When the month is defined in a two character format (that is, mm), the input is numeric.
Canada – Canadian date parsing interprets the first number of an unformatted date string as a day rather than a month.
International – Currently not used.
Chapter 17 Effective Date 1 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 59
ConstantsMessage Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Past
Purpose Defines the number of days, in the past, the System accepts for a date.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
System Use When a past date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is previous to the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date prior to 29 October 1992.
No limit – The System accepts all past dates.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future
Purpose Defines the number of days in the future that will be accepted for a date entry.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
60 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When a future date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is greater than the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date greater than 02 November 1992.
Compares the entered date against the number defined in this field. When the entered date exceeds this number, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date to be entered.
No limit – The System accepts all future dates.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 61
Chapter 18
Effective Date 2 Data Element
OverviewThe Effective Date 2 data element is used to create a field that defines the start (effective) date of the subscriber's secondary insurance coverage.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Effective Date 2 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Effective Date 2 data element:
None
Variations The Effective Date 2 data element consists of the following variations:
Allow Copy From Effective Date 1 – This variation allows the date defined in the Effective Date 1 data element field to be copied into this data element field. The following fields display for the Allow Copy From Effective Date 1 variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierEffective Date 1Days In PastDays In FutureStandard – This variation causes the System to prompt for a date to be entered; the date defined in the Effective Date 1 data element field cannot be copied. The following fields display for the Standard variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierDays In PastDays In Future
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
62 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Effective Date 2 data element is accessed, the System prompts for an effective date to be entered. The System accepts the following date formats:
t (today) – Displays the current System date.
t +/- offset – Displays the current System date plus or minus a valid offset. The System accepts the following offsets:
(n) number – Indicates the offset is a number of days, indicated by n. For example, t+1 is tomorrow and t-1 is yesterday.
nw – Indicates the offset is a number of weeks, indicated by n. For example, t+3w is three weeks or 21 days in the future.
nm – Indicates the offset is a number of months, indicated by n. When the date offset is a month, only the month and year display. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+3m is March 1992.
ny – Indicates the offset is a number of years, indicated by n. When the offset is a year, only the year displays. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+2y is 1993.
Acceptable date formats are determined by the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters level, Date Parsing field. Depending on the Date Parsing Option selected, the System accepts the date in the following formats:
U.S.A.
The month (m), day (d), and year (y) can be defined in the following formats:
mm-dd-yy
mm/dd/yy
dd mmm yy
dd mmm yyyy
The month and year can be defined in the following formats:
mm/yy
mm-yy
mmm yyyy
The year can be defined as yyyy.
When a month is defined in a three character format (that is, mmm), the input is alphabetic characters. When the month is defined in a two character format (that is, mm), the input is numeric.
Chapter 18 Effective Date 2 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 63
Canada – Canadian date parsing interprets the first number of an unformatted date string as a day rather than a month.
International – Currently not used.
ConstantsMessage Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Effective Date 1
Purpose Defines the text that displays as part of the message modifier.
Input Free text
Greater than 35 characters is impractical for display purposes.
Required
System Use Displays this text in place of the <effective date 1> section of the message modifier.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Past
Purpose Defines the number of days in the past the System accepts for a date.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
64 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When a past date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is previous to the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date prior to 29 October 1992.
No limit – The System accepts all past dates.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future
Purpose Defines the number of days in the future that will be accepted for a date entry.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
System Use When a future date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is greater than the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date later than 02 November 1992.
No limit – The System accepts all future dates.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Past (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 65
Chapter 19
Effective Date 3 Data Element
OverviewThe Effective Date 3 data element is used to create a field that defines the start (effective) date of the subscriber's tertiary insurance coverage.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Effective Date 3 data element is accessed, the System prompts for an effective date to be entered. The System accepts the following date formats:
t (today) – Displays the current System date.
t +/- offset – Displays the current System date plus or minus a valid offset. The System accepts the following offsets:
(n) number – Indicates the offset is a number of days, indicated by n. For example, t+1 is tomorrow and t-1 is yesterday.
nw – Indicates the offset is a number of weeks, indicated by n. For example, t+3w is three weeks or 21 days in the future.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Effective Date 3 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Effective Date 3 data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
66 QuadraMed Corporation
nm – Indicates the offset is a number of months, indicated by n. When the date offset is a month, only the month and year display. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+3m is March 1992.
ny – Indicates the offset is a number of years, indicated by n. When the offset is a year, only the year displays. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+2y is 1993.
Acceptable date formats are determined by the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters level, Date Parsing field. Depending on the Date Parsing Option selected, the System accepts the date in the following formats:
U.S.A.
The month (m), day (d), and year (y) can be defined in the following formats:
mm-dd-yy
mm/dd/yy
dd mmm yy
dd mmm yyyy
The month and year can be defined in the following formats:
mm/yy
mm-yy
mmm yyyy
The year can be defined as yyyy.
When a month is defined in a three character format (that is, mmm), the input is alphabetic characters. When the month is defined in a two character format (that is, mm), the input is numeric.
Canada – Canadian date parsing interprets the first number of an unformatted date string as a day rather than a month.
International – Currently not used.
Chapter 19 Effective Date 3 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 67
ConstantsMessage Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Past
Purpose Defines the number of days in the past that will be accepted for a date entry.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
System Use When a past date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is previous to the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date prior to 29 October 1992.
No limit – The System accepts all past dates.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future
Purpose Defines the number of days in the future that will be accepted for a date entry.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
68 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When a future date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is greater than the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date greater than 02 November 1992.
No limit – The System accepts all future dates.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 69
Chapter 20
Expiration Date Data Element
OverviewThe Expiration Date data element is used to create an insurance field that collects the expiration date of the subscriber's insurance coverage.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Expiration Date data element is accessed, the System prompts for a date to be entered. The System accepts the following date formats:
t (today) – Displays the current System date.
t +/- offset – Displays the current System date plus or minus a valid offset. The System accepts the following offsets:
(n) number – Indicates the offset is a number of days, indicated by n. For example, t+1 is tomorrow and t-1 is yesterday.
nw – Indicates the offset is a number of weeks, indicated by n. For example, t+3w is three weeks or 21 days in the future.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Expiration Date data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Expiration Date data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
70 QuadraMed Corporation
nm – Indicates the offset is a number of months, indicated by n. When the date offset is a month, only the month and year display. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+3m is March 1992.
ny – Indicates the offset is a number of years, indicated by n. When the offset is a year, only the year displays. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+2y is 1993.
Acceptable date formats are determined by the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters level, Date Parsing field. Depending on the Date Parsing Option selected, the System accepts the date in the following formats:
U.S.A.
The month (m), day (d), and year (y) can be defined in the following formats:
mm-dd-yy
mm/dd/yy
dd mmm yy
dd mmm yyyy
The month and year can be defined in the following formats:
mm/yy
mm-yy
mmm yyyy
The year can be defined as yyyy.
When a month is defined in a three character format (that is, mmm), the input is alphabetic characters. When the month is defined in a two character format (that is, mm), the input is numeric.
Canada – Canadian date parsing interprets the first number of an unformatted date string as a day rather than a month.
International – Currently not used.
Chapter 20 Expiration Date Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 71
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Past
Purpose Defines the number of days in the past that will be accepted for a date entry.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
System Use When a past date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is previous to the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date prior to 29 October 1992.
No limit – The System accepts all past dates.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future
Purpose Defines the number of days in the future that will be accepted for a date entry.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
72 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When a future date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is greater than the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date greater than 02 November 1992.
No limit – The System accepts all future dates.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 73
Chapter 21
Explanation Code Data Element
OverviewThe Explanation Code data element is used to create a field that allows an explanation code to be defined during insurance processing. Explanation codes are used in the UB-82 Billing Code System to provide standard data collection and billing practices for third party payment processing.
For example, the explanation code can provide a breakdown of the location in which a CAT Scan is given (Example: E1 – Head, E2 – Spine). The explanation code can also be used to indicate the medical necessity of an emergency room service (Example: When an emergency room service is based on medical necessity, Blue Cross requires that a certain code be used. Some of the codes are as follows: A1 – Acute illness, patient admitted; A2 – Acute illness, patient not admitted).
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Explanation Code data element is accessed, the System displays a list of Explanation Code Options and prompts for one to be selected. Explanation Code Options are defined in the Explanation Code Table, ^rt("ex").
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Explanation Code data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Explanation Code data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
74 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 75
Chapter 22
Financial Class Data Element
OverviewThe Financial Class data element is used to create a field that defines the patient's financial class for a particular visit. A financial class is the category a patient is placed into based on the party responsible for reimbursing the hospital for services rendered during a visit.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Financial Class data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, can display a list of Financial Class Options and prompt for one to be selected.
The information that defaults into this data element field is a result of the financial class calculation.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Financial Class data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Financial Class data element:
None
Variations The Financial Class data element consists of the following variations:
Display Only – This variation only allows the data element to be viewed. There are no constants defined for this variation.
Standard – This variation allows the data element to be edited. The following field displays for the Standard variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
76 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 77
Chapter 23
Formatted Entry 1 Data Element
OverviewThe Formatted Entry 1 data element is used to create a field for collecting data that must be entered in a specific format (Example: A passport number, district number, or grant number). The format can be a specific sequence of alpha characters, numbers, and punctuation.
Data Element Attributes
Although this data element is still supported, the Generic Formatted Entry data element should be used instead of this data element.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Formatted Entry 1 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Formatted Entry 1 data element:
None
Variations The Formatted Entry 1 data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays an XP icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field.
The following fields can display for the Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum Length
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
78 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Formatted Entry 1 data element is accessed, the System prompts for data to be entered. Once data has been entered, the System checks the entered data against the defined format. When the entered format is invalid, the System displays an error message.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
LengthVerification ExpressionNo Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the No Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 23 Formatted Entry 1 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 79
Display Type
Purpose Defines how the data element is to be entered.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to Format
System Use (F) Format – Displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) field when the data element is accessed. Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the valid formats.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a format, the following information must be used:
A – Defines the alphabetic characters used in the format.
9 – Defines the numbers used in the format.Punctuation marks – Defines a punctuation mark as itself.
For example, when the format is defined as AA-999, a valid entry is CD-123.
System Use Compares the entered data against the defined format and displays an error message when the entered data is in an invalid format.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the formatted entry is displayed.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to No
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
80 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the length of the longest format specified.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check, such as numbers must start with a specific number or set of numbers (Example: 12 or 1812).
Input Mumps code/operations (that is, !,|, $s)
Data values (that is, 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates/performs the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered into the System inaccurately and an error message displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 81
Chapter 24
Formatted Entry 2 Data Element
OverviewThe Formatted Entry 2 data element is used to create a field for collecting data that must be entered in a specific format (Example: A passport number, district number, or grant number). The format can be a specific sequence of alpha characters, numbers, and punctuation.
Data Element Attributes
Although this data element is still supported, the Generic Formatted Entry data element should be used instead of this data element.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Formatted Entry 2 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Formatted Entry 2 data element:
None
Variations The Formatted Entry 2 data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays an XP icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the Expand variation:
The following fields can display for the Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay Type
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
82 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Formatted Entry 2 data element is accessed, the System prompts for data to be entered. Once data has been entered, the System checks the entered data against the defined format. When the entered format is invalid, the System displays an error message.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification ExpressionNo Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the No Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 24 Formatted Entry 2 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 83
Display Type
Purpose Defines how the data element is to be entered.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to format
System Use (F) Format – Displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) field when the data element is accessed. Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the valid format.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a format, the following information must be used:
A – Defines the alphabetic characters used in the format.
9 – Defines the numbers used in the format.
Punctuation marks – Defines a punctuation mark as itself.
For example, when the format is defined as AA-999, a valid entry is CD-123.
System Use Compares the entered data against the defined format and displays an error message when the entered data is in an invalid format.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the formatted entry is displayed.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
84 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the length of the longest format specified.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check, such as numbers must start with a specific number or set of numbers (Example: 12 or 1812).
Input Mumps code/operations (that is, !,|, $s)
Data values (that is, 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates/performs the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered into the System inaccurately and an error message displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 85
Chapter 25
Formatted Entry 3 Data Element
OverviewThe Formatted Entry 3 data element is used to create a field for collecting data that must be entered in a specific format (Example: A passport number, district number, or grant number). The format can be a specific sequence of alpha characters, numbers, and punctuation.
Data Element Attributes
Although this data element is still supported, the Generic Formatted Entry data element should be used instead of this data element.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Formatted Entry 3 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Formatted Entry 3 data element:
None
Variations The Formatted Entry 3 data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays an XP icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field.The following fields can display for the Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
86 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Formatted Entry 3 data element is accessed, the System prompts for data to be entered. Once data has been entered, the System checks the entered data against the defined format. When the entered format is invalid, the System displays an error message.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
No Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the No Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 25 Formatted Entry 3 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 87
Display Type
Purpose Defines how the data element is to be entered.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to format
System Use (F) Format – Displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) field when the data element is accessed. Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the valid format.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a format, the following information must be used:
A – Defines the alphabetic characters used in the format.
9 – Defines the numbers used in the format.
Punctuation marks – Defines a punctuation mark as itself.
For example, when the format is defined as AA-999, a valid entry is CD-123.
System Use Compares the entered data against the defined format and displays an error message when the entered data is in an invalid format.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the formatted entry is displayed.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
88 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the length of the longest format specified.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check, such as numbers must start with a specific number or set of numbers (Example: 12 or 1812).
Input Mumps code/operations (that is, !,|, $s)
Data values (that is, 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates/performs the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered into the System inaccurately and an error message displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 89
Chapter 26
Formatted Entry 4 Data Element
OverviewThe Formatted Entry 4 data element is used to create a field for collecting data that must be entered in a specific format (Example: A passport number, district number, or grant number). The format can be a specific sequence of alpha characters, numbers, and punctuation.
Data Element Attributes
Although this data element is still supported, the Generic Formatted Entry data element should be used instead of this data element.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Formatted Entry 4 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Formatted Entry 4 data element:
None
Variations The Formatted Entry 4 data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays an XP icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field.
The following fields can display for the Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
90 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Formatted Entry 4 data element is accessed, the System prompts for data to be entered. Once data has been entered, the System checks the entered data against the defined format. When the entered format is invalid, the System displays an error message.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
No Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the No Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 26 Formatted Entry 4 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 91
Display Type
Purpose Defines how the data element is to be entered.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to format
System Use (F) Format – Displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) field when the data element is accessed. Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the valid format.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a format, the following information must be used:
A – Defines the alphabetic characters used in the format.
9 – Defines the numbers used in the format.
Punctuation marks – Defines a punctuation mark as itself.
For example, when the format is defined as AA-999, a valid entry is CD-123.
System Use Compares the entered data against the defined format and displays an error message when the entered data is in an invalid format.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the formatted entry is displayed.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
92 QuadraMed Corporation
.
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the length of the longest format specified.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check, such as numbers must start with a specific number or set of numbers (Example: 12 or 1812).
Input Mumps code/operations (that is, !,|, $s)
Data values (that is, 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates/performs the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered into the System inaccurately and an error message displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 93
Chapter 27
Formatted Entry 5 Data Element
OverviewThe Formatted Entry 5 data element is used to create a field for collecting data that must be entered in a specific format (Example: A passport number, district number, or grant number). The format can be a specific sequence of alpha characters, numbers, and punctuation.
Data Element Attributes
Although this data element is still supported, the Generic Formatted Entry data element should be used instead of this data element.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Formatted Entry 5 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Formatted Entry 5 data element:
None
Variations The Formatted Entry 5 data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays an XP icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
94 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Formatted Entry 5 data element is accessed, the System prompts for data to be entered. Once data has been entered, the System checks the entered data against the defined format. When the entered format is invalid, the System displays an error message.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
No Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the No Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 27 Formatted Entry 5 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 95
Display Type
Purpose Defines how the data element is to be entered.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to format
System Use (F) Format – Displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) field when the data element is accessed. Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the valid format.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a format, the following information must be used:
A – Defines the alphabetic characters used in the format.
9 – Defines the numbers used in the format.
Punctuation marks – Defines a punctuation mark as itself.
For example, when the format is defined as AA-999, a valid entry is CD-123.
System Use Compares the entered data against the defined format and displays an error message when the entered data is in an invalid format.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the formatted entry is displayed.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
96 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the length of the longest format specified.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check, such as numbers must start with a specific number or set of numbers (Example: 12 or 1812).
Input Mumps code/operations (that is, !,|, $s)
Data values (that is, 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates/performs the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered into the System inaccurately and an error message displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 97
Chapter 28
Formatted Entry 6 Data Element
OverviewThe Formatted Entry 6 data element is used to create a field for collecting data that must be entered in a specific format (Example: A passport number, district number, or grant number). The format can be a specific sequence of alpha characters, numbers, and punctuation.
Data Element Attributes
Although this data element is still supported, the Generic Formatted Entry data element should be used instead of this data element.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Formatted Entry 6 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Formatted Entry 6 data element:
None
Variations The Formatted Entry 6 data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays an XP icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
98 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Formatted Entry 6 data element is accessed, the System prompts for data to be entered. Once data has been entered, the System checks the entered data against the defined format. When the entered format is invalid, the System displays an error message.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
No Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the No Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 28 Formatted Entry 6 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 99
Display Type
Purpose Defines how the data element is to be entered.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to format
System Use (F) Format – Displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) field when the data element is accessed. Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the valid format.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a format, the following information must be used:
A – Defines the alphabetic characters used in the format.
9 – Defines the numbers used in the format.
Punctuation marks – Defines a punctuation mark as itself.
For example, when the format is defined as AA-999, a valid entry is CD-123.
System Use Compares the entered data against the defined format and displays an error message when the entered data is in an invalid format.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the formatted entry is displayed.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
100 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the length of the longest format specified.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check, such as numbers must start with a specific number or set of numbers (Example: 12 or 1812).
Input Mumps code/operations (that is, !,|, $s)
Data values (that is, 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates/performs the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered into the System inaccurately and an error message displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 101
Chapter 29
Formatted Entry 7 Data Element
OverviewThe Formatted Entry 7 data element is used to create a field for collecting data that must be entered in a specific format (Example: A passport number, district number, or grant number). The format can be a specific sequence of alpha characters, numbers, and punctuation.
Data Element Attributes
Although this data element is still supported, the Generic Formatted Entry data element should be used instead of this data element.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Formatted Entry 7 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Formatted Entry 7 data element:
None
Variations The Formatted Entry 7 data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays an XP icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
102 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Formatted Entry 7 data element is accessed, the System prompts for data to be entered. Once data has been entered, the System checks the entered data against the defined format. When the entered format is invalid, the System displays an error message.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
No Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the No Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 29 Formatted Entry 7 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 103
Display Type
Purpose Defines how the data element is to be entered.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to format
System Use (F) Format – Displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) field when the data element is accessed. Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the valid format.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a format, the following information must be used:
A – Defines the alphabetic characters used in the format.
9 – Defines the numbers used in the format.
Punctuation marks – Defines a punctuation mark as itself.
For example, when the format is defined as AA-999, a valid entry is CD-123.
System Use Compares the entered data against the defined format and displays an error message when the entered data is in an invalid format.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the formatted entry is displayed.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
104 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the length of the longest format specified.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check, such as numbers must start with a specific number or set of numbers (Example: 12 or 1812).
Input Mumps code/operations (that is, !,|, $s)
Data values (that is, 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates/performs the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered into the System inaccurately and an error message displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 105
Chapter 30
Formatted Entry 8 Data Element
OverviewThe Formatted Entry 8 data element is used to create a field for collecting data that must be entered in a specific format (Example: A passport number, district number, or grant number). The format can be a specific sequence of alpha characters, numbers, and punctuation.
Data Element Attributes
Although this data element is still supported, the Generic Formatted Entry data element should be used instead of this data element.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Formatted Entry 8 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Formatted Entry 8 data element:
None
Variations The Formatted Entry 8 data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays an XP icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
106 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Formatted Entry 8 data element is accessed, the System prompts for data to be entered. Once data has been entered, the System checks the entered data against the defined format. When the entered format is invalid, the System displays an error message.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
No Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the No Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 30 Formatted Entry 8 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 107
Display Type
Purpose Defines how the data element is to be entered.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to format
System Use (F) Format – Displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) field when the data element is accessed. Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the valid format.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a format, the following information must be used:
A – Defines the alphabetic characters used in the format.
9 – Defines the numbers used in the format.
Punctuation marks – Defines a punctuation mark as itself.
For example, when the format is defined as AA-999, a valid entry is CD-123.
System Use Compares the entered data against the defined format and displays an error message when the entered data is in an invalid format.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the formatted entry is displayed.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
108 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the length of the longest format specified.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check, such as numbers must start with a specific number or set of numbers (Example: 12 or 1812).
Input Mumps code/operations (that is, !,|, $s)
Data values (that is, 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates/performs the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered into the System inaccurately and an error message displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 109
Chapter 31
Formatted Entry 9 Data Element
OverviewThe Formatted Entry 9 data element is used to create a field for collecting data that must be entered in a specific format (Example: A passport number, district number, or grant number). The format can be a specific sequence of alpha characters, numbers, and punctuation.
Data Element Attributes
Although this data element is still supported, the Generic Formatted Entry data element should be used instead of this data element.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Formatted Entry 9 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Formatted Entry 9 data element:
None
Variations The Formatted Entry 9 data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays an XP icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
110 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Formatted Entry 9 data element is accessed, the System prompts for data to be entered. Once data has been entered, the System checks the entered data against the defined format. When the entered format is invalid, the System displays an error message.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
No Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the No Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 31 Formatted Entry 9 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 111
Display Type
Purpose Defines how the data element is to be entered.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to format
System Use (F) Format – Displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) field when the data element is accessed. Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the valid format.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a format, the following information must be used:
A – Defines the alphabetic characters used in the format.
9 – Defines the numbers used in the format.
Punctuation marks – Defines a punctuation mark as itself.
For example, when the format is defined as AA-999, a valid entry is CD-123.
System Use Compares the entered data against the defined format and displays an error message when the entered data is in an invalid format.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the formatted entry is displayed.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
112 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the length of the longest format specified.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check, such as numbers must start with a specific number or set of numbers (Example: 12 or 1812).
Input Mumps code/operations (that is, !,|, $s)
Data values (that is, 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates/performs the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered into the System inaccurately and an error message displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 113
Chapter 32
Formatted Entry 10 Data Element
OverviewThe Formatted Entry 10 data element is used to create a field for collecting data that must be entered in a specific format (Example: A passport number, district number, or grant number). The format can be a specific sequence of alpha characters, numbers, and punctuation.
Data Element Attributes
Although this data element is still supported, the Generic Formatted Entry data element should be used instead of this data element.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Formatted Entry 10 data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Formatted Entry 10 data element:
None
Variations The Formatted Entry 10 data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays an XP icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
114 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Formatted Entry 10 data element is accessed, the System prompts for data to be entered. Once data has been entered, the System checks the entered data against the defined format. When the entered format is invalid, the System displays an error message.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
No Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the No Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 32 Formatted Entry 10 Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 115
Display Type
Purpose Defines how the data element is to be entered.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to format
System Use (F) Format – Displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) field when the data element is accessed. Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the valid formats.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a format, the following information must be used:
A – Defines the alphabetic characters used in the format.
9 – Defines the numbers used in the format.
Punctuation marks – Defines a punctuation mark as itself.
For example, when the format is defined as AA-999, a valid entry is CD-123.
System Use Compares the entered data against the defined format and displays an error message when the entered data is in an invalid format.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the formatted entry is displayed.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
116 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the length of the longest format specified.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check, such as numbers must start with a specific number or set of numbers (Example: 12 or 1812).
Input Mumps code/operations (that is, !,|, $s)
Data values (that is, 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates/performs the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered into the System inaccurately and an error message displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 117
Chapter 33
Free-Text Insurance/Payor Name Data Element
OverviewThe Free-Text Insurance/Payor Name data element is used to create an insurance field that allows a free-text insurance/payor name to be entered. This data element field is used for those occasions when admitting/registration needs to add an insurance to the patient's record and the insurance name is not defined in the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip").
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Free-Text Insurance/Payor Name data element is accessed, the System prompts for a name to be entered. The name is entered as free-text.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Free-Text Insurance/Payor Name data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Free-Text Insurance/Payor Name data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
118 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 119
Chapter 34
Generic Choose Data Element
OverviewThe Generic Choose data element is used to create a field whose data must be internally coded. Choose data elements present the user with a defined set of options that are embedded within the transaction line. Each option is associated with an alphabetic character. The alphabetic character is entered to choose the associated option. This data element can also be used to create a field that accepts a yes/no answer. The Generic Choose data element is to be used only when the other non-generic data elements within the insurance/payor data dictionary do not apply.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Generic Choose data element is accessed, the QuadraMed CPR System displays the transaction line defined in the Prompt Constants field and prompts the user to choose an option.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Generic Choose data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Generic Choose data element:
Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
120 QuadraMed Corporation
The entry of the alphabetic character associated with the desired option causes the option to be recorded. The System can copy forward generic insurance data from a previous visit into the current visit when the following conditions are met:
The insurance is copied forward during one of the following processes:
Adding a new visit
Copying a previous visit into a new visit
Changing visit types during a visit add
Converting a visit
The field created from this data element has information defined.
The Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi"), Copy Data Forward? field is defined as yes for the option defined in the Storage Reference Constants field of this data element.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Prompt
Purpose Defines the transaction line that displays when this data element is selected during insurance processing.
Input Free-text beginning with the verb Choose
Each choose value must be included in the prompt. For example, if the following choose values are defined:
The transaction line (prompt) should be defined as:
Choose alpha(A) or beta(B)
Alternatively, when the choose values are defined for a Yes/No field:
VALUE INTERNAL DISPLAY TEXT
A 1 alpha
B 2 beta
VALUE INTERNAL DISPLAY TEXT
N 0 no
Y 1 yes
Chapter 34 Generic Choose Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 121
The transaction line (prompt) should be defined as:
Patient located? no
The no default occurred because the n value is defined as 0.
Required
System Use Displays this transaction line when the data element is selected during insurance processing.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Choose Values
Purpose Defines the character value accepted as input.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a value, the System prompts for the following:
Value
Alphabetic character
Each alphabetic character must be unique
Internal value
Integer
Each internal value must be unique
Display text
Free-text
Required
System Use Value – Determines the alphabetic character used to define an allowable option. The user can enter the selection letter as either upper or lower case. The System upshifts all lower case entries.
Internal value – Determines the value associated with the option being defined. When the internal value for an option is defined as 0, the System displays that option as the default value. Typically, in Yes/No fields, the no response is defined as the default value.
Display text – Determines the text associated with the choose value that displays in the transaction line and in the field created from this data element.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Prompt (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
122 QuadraMed Corporation
Storage Reference
Purpose Defines the location in which the information defined in this data element is stored.
Input Single selection
Links from the Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Required
System Use Determines the storage location where the choose data is stored.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 123
Chapter 35
Generic Date/Time Data Element
OverviewThe Generic Date/Time data element is used to create a field that allows the entry of a date and/or time during insurance processing. This data element is to be used only when the other non-generic date/time data elements within the insurance/payor data dictionary do not apply.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Generic Date/Time data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Generic Date/Time data element:
Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Variations The Generic Date/Time data element consists of the following variations:
Date – This variation only accepts entry of a date. The System does not allow a time to be entered. The following fields display for the Date variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierAllow Approximate?Storage ReferenceDate/Time – This variation accepts the entry of a date and time. The following fields display for the Date/Time variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierAllow Approximate?Storage Reference
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
124 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Generic Date/Time data element is accessed, the QuadraMed CPR System, depending on the variation selected, prompts for either a date and/or a time to be entered. The System allows the date to be entered in the following formats:
t (today) – Displays the current System date.
t +/- (offset) – Displays the current System date plus/minus a valid offset. QuadraMed CPR accepts the following offsets:
number(n) – Indicates the offset is a number of days (Example: t-1 is yesterday, based on the current System date).
nw – Indicates the offset is a number of weeks (Example: t-3w is 3 weeks ago).
nm – Indicates the offset is a number of months (Example: If today is 9 August 92, then t-3m is 9 May 1992).
ny – Indicates the offset is a number of years (Example: If today is 9 August 93, then t-2y is 9 August 1991).
The format in which the System accepts dates is determined by the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters level, Date Parsing field. The date parsing options, along with their defined formats, are as follows:
U.S.A.
Month-Day-Year in one of the following formats:
mm-dd-yy
mm/dd/yy
dd mmm yy
dd mmm yyyy
Month-Year in one of the following formats:
mm/yy
mm-yy
Time – This variation only allows entry of a time. The System does not allow a date to be entered. The following fields display for the Time variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierAllow Approximate?Storage Reference
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 35 Generic Date/Time Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 125
mmm yyyy
Year as yyyy
When approximate dates are allowed, any of the U.S.A. formats can be prefixed by a tilde (~) to indicate an approximate date. For example, ~June 1991.
When a month is defined with a three character format (that is, mmm), the input is alphabetic characters (Example: Dec). When the month is defined with a two character format (that is, mm), the input is numeric (Example:12).
Canada – Canadian parsing interprets the first number of an unformatted date string as a day rather than as a month.
International – Currently not used.
QuadraMed CPR allows a date and time to be entered in the following formats:
n (now) – Current System date and time.
t (today) – Current System date. A t can be entered followed by a time (Example: t 0700 is today at 0700).
Date and time – All the previously identified date formats are acceptable with the following time formats:
As a 24-hour time (Example: 1300 for 1 pm)
As hh:mm am/pm (Example: 11:15 pm)
n - (offset) – Current System date minus an allowed offset. QuadraMed CPR accepts the following offsets:
number (n) – Indicates the offset is a number of minutes (Example: n-30 is 30 minutes ago).
nh – Indicates the offset is a number of hours (Example: n-2h is 2 hours ago).
The System evaluates each entered time for the proper format. When an unrecognized format is entered, the System displays an error message.
The System can copy forward generic insurance data from a previous visit into the current visit when the following conditions are met:
The insurance is copied forward during one of the following processes:
Adding a new visit
Copying a previous visit into a new visit
Changing visit types during a visit add
Converting a visit
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
126 QuadraMed Corporation
The field created from this data element has information defined. The Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi"), Copy Data Forward? field is defined as yes for the option defined in the Storage Reference Constants field of this data element.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Allow Approximate?
Purpose Defines whether the System allows an approximate date/time to be entered.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
System Use Yes – Indicates an approximate date/time can be entered, prefixed by a tilde (~).
No – Indicates the System does not recognize an approximate date/time.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Storage Reference
Purpose Defines the location in which the information defined in this data element is stored.
Input Single selection
Links from the Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Required
Chapter 35 Generic Date/Time Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 127
System Use Determines where the date/time entered into this data element field is stored.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Storage Reference (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
128 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 129
Chapter 36
Generic Employee Name Data Element
OverviewThe Generic Employee Name data element is used to create a field that allows an employee to be defined. This data element is to be used only when the other non-generic data elements within the insurance/payor data dictionary do not apply.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Generic Employee Name data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Generic Employee Name data element:
Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Variations The Generic Employee Name data element consists of the following variations:
Multiple Employees – This variation allows more than one employee to be selected during insurance processing. The number of employees that display is limited to the number of lines specified in the Data Element Definition Screen, # Lines field. The following fields display for the Multiple Employees variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierEmployee Type(s)Display TypeStorage ReferenceSingle Employee – This variation allows only one employee to be selected during insurance processing. The following fields display for the Single Employee variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierEmployee Type(s)Display TypeStorage Reference
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
130 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Generic Employee Name data element is accessed, the System prompts for an employee ID to be entered. The EXPD key can be pressed to select the employee by department, specialty, type, group, or ID type. Only those employees with the same employee type as defined in the Employee Type(s) Constants field of this data element display for selection.
The System can copy forward generic insurance data from a previous visit into the current visit when the following conditions are met:
The insurance is copied forward during one of the following processes:
Adding a new visit
Copying a previous visit into a new visit
Changing visit types during a visit add
Converting a visit
The field created from this data element has information defined.
The Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi"), Copy Data Forward? field is defined as yes for the option defined in the Storage Reference Constants field of this data element.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 36 Generic Employee Name Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 131
Employee Type(s)
Purpose Defines the type of employee or employees that displays for selection when this data element is selected.
Input Facility-specific
Add/Delete Editor
Multiple selection
Links from the Employee Type Table, ^aet("et")
System Use Determines the type of employee that displays for selection when this data element is accessed during insurance processing.
When not defined, all employees types can be selected.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Type
Purpose Defines the information that displays for the identified employee.
Input Single selection from the following hard-coded options:
Name/title
Name/title,specialty,admitting privileges
Number,name/title,job title,department
Name/title,department/section
Name/title,group,specialty,beeper
Required
System Use Determines the information that displays for the identified employee.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Storage Reference
Purpose Defines the location in which the information defined in this data element is stored.
Input Single selection
Links from the Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Required
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
132 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use Determines where the employee name(s) defined in this data element field is stored.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Storage Reference (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 133
Chapter 37
Generic Formatted Entry Data Element
OverviewThe Generic Formatted Entry data element is used to create a field for collecting data that must be entered in a specific format (Example: passport number, district number, grant number, and so on). The format can be a specific sequence of alpha characters, numbers, and/or punctuation. This data element is to be used only when the other non-generic data elements within the insurance/payor data dictionary do not apply.
Data Element Attributes
Although, the Formatted Entry (1-10) data elements are still supported, this data element should be used instead of the Formatted Entry (1-10) data elements.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Generic Formatted Entry data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Generic Formatted Entry data element:
Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Variations The Generic Formatted Entry data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays an expand icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field.
The following fields can display for the Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum Length
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
134 QuadraMed Corporation
LengthCheck Digit TypeVerification ExpressionStorage ReferenceExpand Add/Delete – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays an expand icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Multiple entries are allowed per data element field.
The following fields can display for the Expand Add/Delete variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthCheck Digit TypeVerification ExpressionStorage ReferenceNo Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field.
The following fields can display for the No Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthCheck Digit TypeVerification ExpressionStorage ReferenceNo Expand Add/Delete – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Multiple entries are allowed.
The following fields can display for the No Expand Add/Delete variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthCheck Digit TypeVerification ExpressionStorage Reference
Chapter 37 Generic Formatted Entry Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 135
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Generic Formatted Entry data element is accessed, the System prompts for data to be entered. Once data has been entered, the System checks the entered data against the defined format. When the entered format is invalid, the System displays an error message.
The System can copy forward generic insurance data from a previous visit into the current visit when the following conditions are met:
The insurance is copied forward during one of the following processes:
Adding a new visit
Copying a previous visit into a new visit
Changing visit types during a visit add
Converting a visit
The field created from this data element has information defined.
The Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi"), Copy Data Forward? field is defined as yes for the option defined in the Storage Reference Constants field of this data element.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
136 QuadraMed Corporation
Display Type
Purpose Defines how information is to be entered into the data element field.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to format
System Use (F) Format – Displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) field when the data element is accessed or the XP key is pressed. Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of free-text characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the valid format.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a format, the following characters must be used:
A – Defines the alphabetic characters used in the format.
9 – Defines the numbers used in the format.
Punctuation marks – Defines a punctuation mark as itself.
For example, when the format is defined as AA-999, a valid entry is CD-123.
System Use Compares the entered data against the defined format and displays an error message when the entered data is in an invalid format.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the formatted entry displays.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
Chapter 37 Generic Formatted Entry Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 137
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the length of the longest format specified.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Check Digit Type
Purpose Defines the algorithm that determines the check digit. Check digits are redundant digits added to an input value for error detection.
Input (T) Mod 10
(E) Mod 11
(N) No check digit
Defaults to no
System Use (T) Mod 10 – Indicates a Modulus 10 check digit method is used to determine whether the number was entered into the System accurately.
(E) Mod 11 – Indicates a Modulus 11 check digit method is used to determine whether the number was entered into the System accurately.
(N) No check digit – Indicates no check is to be performed on input to the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
138 QuadraMed Corporation
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check, such as numbers must start with a specific number or set of numbers (Example: 12 or 1812).
Input Mumps code/operations (that is, !,|, $s)
For a complete description of calculations/expressions, see Chapter 5, Calculations/Expressions in the Introduction to CPR Tables.
Data values (Example: 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered into the System inaccurately and an error message displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Storage Reference
Purpose Defines the location in which the information defined in this data element is stored.
Input Single selection
Links from the Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Required
System Use Determines where the formatted data defined in this data element field is stored.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 139
Chapter 38
Generic Free-Text Data Element
OverviewThe Generic Free-Text data element is used to create a field that collects comments and/or other unformatted data. The information can be entered using any alphabetic, numeric, or punctuation characters. This data element is to be used only when the other non-generic data elements within the insurance/payor data dictionary do not apply.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Generic Free-Text data element is accessed, the System prompts for free-text entry of data. The System accepts up to 1023 characters of data.
The System can copy forward generic insurance data from a previous visit into the current visit when the following conditions are met:
The insurance is copied forward during one of the following processes:
Adding a new visit
Copying a previous visit into a new visit
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Generic Free-Text data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Generic Free-Text data element:
Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
140 QuadraMed Corporation
Changing visit types during a visit add
Converting a visit
The field created from this data element has information defined.
The Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi"), Copy Data Forward? field is defined as yes for the option defined in the Storage Reference Constants field of this data element.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 38 Generic Free-Text Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 141
Storage Reference
Purpose Defines the location in which the information defined in this data element is stored.
Input Single selection
Links from the Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Required
System Use Determines where the free-text information defined in this data element field is stored.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
142 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 143
Chapter 39
Generic Hard-Coded Select Screen Data Element
OverviewThe Generic Hard-Coded Select Screen data element is used to collect data from a selection screen. This data element type should be used only when a small number of options (that is, 2-6) are defined for selection and the selected option needs to be coded for use elsewhere in the System (Example: A calculation). This data element is to be used only when the other non-generic data elements within the insurance/payor data dictionary do not apply.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Generic Hard-Coded Select Screen data element is accessed, the QuadraMed CPR System displays a list of options. These options are defined in the Hard-Coded Values Constants field of this data element. The System prompts for an option to be selected.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Generic Hard-Coded Select Screen data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Generic Hard-Coded Select Screen data element:
Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
144 QuadraMed Corporation
The System can copy forward generic insurance data from a previous visit into the current visit when the following conditions are met:
The insurance is copied forward during one of the following processes:
Adding a new visit
Copying a previous visit into a new visit
Changing visit types during a visit add
Converting a visit
The field created from this data element has information defined.
The Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi"), Copy Data Forward? field is defined as yes for the option defined in the Storage Reference Constants field of this data element.
ConstantsMessage Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Hard-Coded Values
Purpose Defines the list of options to be selected for data entry.
Input Insert/Delete Editor
When inserting an option, the following information must be defined:
Internal value
IntegerDisplay text
Free-text
Required
Chapter 39 Generic Hard-Coded Select Screen Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 145
System Use Internal value – Uses this value for various inclusion and billing calculations.
Display text – Determines the text that displays in the field created from this data element when the option is selected.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Storage Reference
Purpose Defines the location in which the information defined in this data element is stored.
Input Single selection
Links from the Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Required
System Use Determines where the option selected from the hard-coded selection screen is stored.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Hard-Coded Values (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
146 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 147
Chapter 40
Generic Multimedia Data Element
OverviewThe Generic Multimedia data element is used to create a field that allows non-textual data (that is, multimedia objects) to be integrated into the QuadraMed CPR computer-based patient record. Care providers can acquire (capture), render (view), and edit (add, delete, and annotate) multimedia data when accessing the field created from this data element.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM the Generic Multimedia data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO the Generic Multimedia data element:
Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt(“gi”)Multimedia Object Catalogue Table, ^mmt(“oc”)Multimedia Rubber Stamp Table, ^mmt(“rs”)Multimedia Server Type Table, ^mmt(“st”)Multimedia Type Table, ^mmt(“t”)
Links FROM the Hierarchical Filing Structure (HFS)
Required Status The required status for this data element is database-defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ̂ rt(“ipp”), Data Element Definition Screen, Required? field, as well as in the Required Expr Expressions field.
NOTE: When both the Required? field and a required expression are defined, the System uses the most restrictive required status.
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
148 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionWhen the field created from this data element is accessed, the System enables one of the following processes to occur:
The Media Manager Client (that is, a computerized digital data capture, rendering and editing application), can be initiated to process multimedia data.
The Image Manager (Server-based) application (that is, a computerized digital data capture, rendering and annotation system) can be initiated to process multimedia data.
A third-party image management client can be initiated to process multimedia data.
In addition to the above configuration, the following additional requirements must be met to process multimedia data from the Media Manager client application in QuadraMed CPR as shown below:
The workstation must have OMCjE (OpenMEd Capture javaExpress)™ 4.1.2 or greater installed. This is required to acquire, edit, or view multimedia objects.
An imaging server running OMM (OpenMed Manager) ™ 3.1.15 or greater for storing and managing multimedia objects
A TWAIN compatible image acquisition device (that is, scanner - with or without a document feeder; digital camera; web camera), should be attached to the local computer in order to capture images.
For the Audio multimedia type: a recording application and appropriate hardware are needed for audio acquisition and storage [as an .mp3 or as a .wav file type] to a directory accessible to the workstation. For playback, a sound card/speaker/ application is necessary.
This requires customization of the image server interface.
The following requirements must be met to enable users to process multimedia data:The customer must have version 3.0 or greater of QuadraMed CPR Ultiview Desktop (for the Image Manager and HTML Manager applications) or version 4.1 or greater of the Clinical Desktop (for the Media Manager Client application) implemented. This is required to access the Multimedia data element and to launch the imaging client.The Device Table, ^ad, Allow Multimedia Edits? field must be defined as yes for the terminal accessing this data element field. This is required in order to cause the field to be selectable for editing, acquiring, or rendering multimedia objects.
The Media Manager functionality is not available in the Ultiview desktop.
Chapter 40 Generic Multimedia Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 149
For the Video multimedia type: a recording application and appropriate hardware are needed for video acquisition and storage [as an .mpg or as an .avi file type] to a directory accessible to the workstation. For playback, a sound card/speaker/application is necessary for video files with sound.
For the Digital Medical Imaging type: a Digitizer Scanner (high resolution scanner) (DICOM-Compliant) for acquiring clinical images from film.
Once the field created from this data element is accessed, the System display depends on how the Multimedia Definition Constants field, Multimedia Type subfield is defined.
When the Multimedia Type subfield is defined as Scanned/Photographic Imaging, Audio, Digital Medical Imaging, or Video, one of the following can occur:
The Capture/Edit Client can be initiated, and the Client Application Screen can open without an object displayed, when the following conditions are met:
A customer must be licensed to use specific multimedia types in the Media Manager application: Scanned/Photographic Imaging, Audio, Video, Digital Medical Imaging.
The audio, digital medical imaging and video multimedia types apply only to the Media Manager client application.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
150 QuadraMed Corporation
No multimedia object is defined in the Multimedia Definition Constants field, Multimedia Catalogue Object(s) subfield of this data element.
No multimedia data has been documented (that is, this is a new capture).
The System accesses a server that has been defined to store the multimedia object defined in the Multimedia Definition Constants field, Multimedia Catalogue Object(s) subfield of this data element. Servers are defined in the Multimedia Definition Constants field, Multimedia Server Type(s) subfield of this data element.
The Client Application Screen can be launched in the following modes:
Capture/Edit – Displays during image acquisition or editing (for example, insurance processing).
Render (Display)/Review – Displays during patient or event review. Displays multimedia objects when the field created from this data element is accessed to review multimedia insurance processing data (that is, scanned picture of insurance card).
In QuadraMed CPR Registration/Insurance Processing, the Scanned/Photographic Imaging multimedia type is useful for patient photography for identification, document imaging (for example, scanning consent forms, insurance cards, and so on). The Audio, Video, or Digital Medical Imaging multimedia file types are useful in order, result, and assessment processing. They can only be acquired through file importing and rendered (displayed) in the data element field and cannot be annotated.
Capture/Edit ModeIn Capture/Edit Mode, multimedia data can be captured, edited, and images can be annotated. In addition, annotation can be disabled at the field level.
When no image is defined in the Multimedia Definition Constants field, Multimedia Catalogue Object(s) subfield, the client application is launched without a pre-defined image (that is, a blank screen). The client allows a user to add a new image during insurance processing by importing or by acquisition using a TWAIN compliant device.
When the Multimedia Definition Constants field, Allow Annotation? subfield of this data element is defined as yes, the Capture/Edit Client allows the user to annotate the scanned/photographic image (that is, mark an image with predefined text, symbols: rubber stamps, or by using other annotation tools to specify an area of interest to the care provider). Rubber stamps are defined in the Multimedia Definition Constants field, Multimedia Rubber Stamp(s) subfield.
The Image Manager application allows an initial annotation tool to display as a pre-selected icon on the Annotation toolbar when the Multimedia Definition Constants field, Initial Annotation Tool subfield is defined with an annotation tool option. The user has the option to do one of the following:
Capture and annotate
Chapter 40 Generic Multimedia Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 151
Capture and not annotate
Not capture and not annotate
Not capture and annotate
After capturing or annotating an image, the image is saved to the server defined in the Multimedia Definition Constants field, Multimedia Server Type(s) subfield of this data element.
Field Display FormatThis data element can be defined to display a thumbnail (that is, miniature) view of the selected image on the order profile for the Scanned/Photographic Imaging multimedia type only, or to display descriptive text in the data element field for all other multimedia types. When the Multimedia Definition Constants field, Display Format subfield is defined as thumbnail, the image defined in the field created from the Multimedia data element displays as a miniature image in the data element field.
A thumbnail can be defined only when the Multimedia Definition Constants field, Multimedia Type subfield is defined with a Scanned/Photographic Imaging multimedia type. The user must be aware that the Data Element Definition Screen of this data element, #Lines field determines the maximum height of the thumbnail image on the profile. The System will always display a thumbnail in correct aspect ratio within the available space.
Printing Images Using Chart Review Print RoutineImages collected by accessing the Media Manager client application in the field created from this data element and associated with a documented event can be printed using the Chart Print routine. The Chart Review Print routine can search for and print data contained in every Multimedia data element, in order. It is necessary to print images for purposes of sharing medical information between providers and other caregivers, as well as in response to request from legal authorities. The Chart Review Print routine can be accessed in the Chart Review menu function by clicking the Print button and pressing the F12 key from an event review screen. The System provides the following print characteristics:
All images from a particular object/event can be excluded. Each item stored in a data element is commonly referred to as an object. Each object can contain multiple images/files. This is based on the definition of the Multimedia Definition Constants field, Suppress Printing? subfield of this data element. When the Suppress Printing? subfield is defined as yes, images collected in this data element field and associated with a documented event are excluded from printing using the Chart Review Print routine. When the Suppress Printing? subfield is defined as no, all images collected in this Multimedia data element field and associated with a documented event are always printed using the Chart Review Print routine.
The printed page displays the data element field number with the words image defined to denote an image is expected to print immediately after the results print.
The System prints the image in order of occurrence, most recent to oldest.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
152 QuadraMed Corporation
The System prints the image with a header/footer containing the chart print event information.
The System can define the size of the image that displays based on the Multimedia Definition Constants field, Image Print Size subfield.
The print queue to which images are routed for printing is defined in the Area Table, ^afa, MM Print Queue field.
Printing Images Using the HTML Printer Server and HTML ReportsUsers can print images captured and stored using the Media Manager client application using the following:
The QuadraMed CPR HTML PrinterServer. The HTML PrinterServer provides the ability for CPR to print HTML reports to printers using an automated process, without requiring user intervention.
A Report Formatter Data Dictionary Table, ^arfd, HTML screen driver report. This report allows images to be printed as follows:
Print all of the images for a patient visit or one/multiple specific patient event
Print all of the images for a patient or one/multiple specific patient event
ConstantsThe following fields can display when the Constants field is accessed:
Storage Reference
Purpose Defines the storage location associated with the generic data element.
Input Single selection
Links from the Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Required
System Use Determines where the System files the generic data element. All data elements, except the generic data elements, have a pre-defined storage location. Generic data elements are user defined/created. When a new data element is created, a storage location must be defined.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 40 Generic Multimedia Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 153
Multimedia Definition
Purpose Defines the parameters that collect the information necessary for multimedia objects to be captured, edited, or rendered in this data element field. In addition, these parameters can allow a customer to define data strings that cause the multimedia client to be configured on-the-fly and override the default settings.
A healthcare facility can pass non-object data (that is, employee ID, and so on) to a third-party imaging client, if necessary, through this multimedia definition (this is not supported in the Media Manager application).
Finally, these parameters define whether printing of images collected using the Media Manager client application and documented in the field created from this data element can be printed using the Chart Review Print routine.
Input Displays the following subfields for definition:
Multimedia Type Suppress Printing?Image Print Size
System Use Allows a multimedia object (for example, image) to be captured, annotated (annotations for scanned/photographic images only), or rendered during insurance processing.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Multimedia Type
Purpose Defines the multimedia object type associated with this data element.
Input Single selection
Links from the Multimedia Type Table, ^mmt(“t”)For the Client-based Media Manager application, the following multimedia types are available for the generic insurance/payor multimedia data element:
Audio
Digital Medical Imaging
Scanned/Photographic Imaging
VideoFor the Server-based Image Manager application, the Scanned/Photographic Imaging multimedia type is available for the generic insurance/payor multimedia data element.
NOTE: Multimedia types for which the customer has no license are unavailable for selection in this subfield.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
154 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use Determines the type of multimedia object is being acquired/rendered
Determines the menus and toolbars that display in the client application
When this subfield is defined as Audio, causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:
Multimedia Server Type(s)Display FormatAdditional Object Data StringAdditional Generated Data String
When this subfield is defined as Digital Medical Imaging, causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:
Multimedia Server Type(s)Display FormatAdditional Object Data StringAdditional Generated Data String
When this Constants field is defined as Scanned/Photographic Imaging, causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:
Multimedia Server Type(s)Multimedia Catalogue Object(s)Display FormatAllow Annotation?Additional Object Data StringAdditional Generated Data String?
When this subfield is defined as Video, causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:
Multimedia Server Type(s)Display FormatAdditional Object Data StringAdditional Generated Data String
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Multimedia Server Type(s)
Purpose Defines the server type (that is, groups of servers) that store documented multimedia objects. Multiple servers can be defined in order to balance the load when a large number of multimedia objects are stored for a facility. The order of servers in a server type group can be changed, or the order of the server types linked to a data element can be changed to provide load balancing among the available object servers in an enterprise.
Multimedia Type (Continued)
Chapter 40 Generic Multimedia Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 155
For example, different departments may want to have their own server, (for example, Registration: to store patient identification images-patient photographs, images of patient insurance cards; Nursing: to store images related to patient care; Cardio-pulmonary: to store EKGs, and so on).
This subfield displays only when the Multimedia Type subfield of this data element is defined as Audio, Digital Medical Imaging, Scanned/Photographic Imaging, Video.
Client-Based Media Manager application
For the current client level-based Media Manager application implementation, multiple servers are not supported for a single data element.
Server-Based Image Manager application
Server-based implementations are expected to support multiple servers for a single data element.
Input Insert/Delete Editor
Single selection
Links from the Multimedia Server Type Table, ^mmt(“st”)
System Use Stores the object on a specific server based on the following order:
First Server Type (for example, Clinical Image Server)
First Server
Second Server
Third Server
Second Server Type (for example, Medical Image Server)
First Server
Second Server
Third Server
For example, a facility has two server types, Clinical Image Server and Medical Image Server. The System looks first to store the image on the first server type defined Clinical Image Server, and stores the image on the first server.
If the first server is unavailable, the System stores the image on the second server, and so on. If all the servers fail on the Clinical Image Server type, the System goes to the second server type defined, Medical Image Server, and continues searching the servers until it locates one that is available to store the image (that is, first server, second server, and so on).
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Multimedia Server Type(s) (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
156 QuadraMed Corporation
Multimedia Catalogue Object(s)
Purpose Defines the multimedia catalogue object that can default into the client application for editing when this data element field is accessed.
One or more multimedia catalogue objects (that is, Scanned/Photographic Image) can be defaulted into a list of predefined objects (that is, images) that can be selected from within the client application.
Multiple pages can be defined for one image during the same documentation episode. This subfield displays only when the Multimedia Type subfield of this data element is defined as Scanned/Photographic Imaging.
Input Insert/Delete Editor
Single selection
Links from the Multimedia Object Catalogue Table, ^mmt(“oc”)NOTE: In order for the object to render properly, the objects defined in this subfield must be of the same type (for example, Scanned/ Photographic Imaging) as defined in the Multimedia Definition Constants field, Multimedia Type subfield.
System Use Can display for the multimedia catalogue object defined in this field for editing or viewing when accessing the field created from this data element during insurance processing
When more than one object is defined, and the client application is in Capture/Edit Mode, the client defaults the object defined first when this data element field is accessed.
In the Image Manager, additional objects can be inserted or other predefined images/pages can be selected using the Image or Page drop-down menu of the Capture/Edit Client.
In the Media Manager, it is recommended to limit the number of catalog objects on one Multimedia data element.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format
Purpose Defines the way in which multimedia insurance data displays on the insurance screen.
Input Single selection from the following hard-coded options:
Text
Free-text
Greater than 15 characters is impractical for display purposes
Thumbnail
Defaults to text: definedNOTE: The following multimedia types do not have the option to display as a thumbnail:
AudioDigital Medical ImagingVideo
Chapter 40 Generic Multimedia Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 157
NOTE: The number of lines defined in the Data Element Definition Screen, #Lines field of this data element determines the available height for display of a thumbnail on the insurance screen. The thumbnail is inserted, in correct aspect ratio, into the available space.
System Use Text – Determines the text that displays in the field created from this data element.
Thumbnail – Displays the thumbnail (that is, miniature image of the multimedia catalogue object) in the field created from this data element.
NOTE: When defining the insurance data to display as a thumbnail image, the user should be aware that a thumbnail display requires access to the object server to display the image. If the server or network is busy, delays or other display issues can be encountered.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Allow Annotation?
Purpose Defines whether annotation is available during insurance processing for the object type defined in the Multimedia Definition Constants field, Multimedia Type subfield. Images can be annotated while preserving the underlying, original data. This subfield displays only when the Multimedia Type subfield is defined as Scanned/Photographic Imaging.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
System Use Yes – Causes the following annotation functionality to be available in the client application:
Displays the Annotation menu options and Annotation Toolbar for the Image Manager
Displays the Display Annotation Toolbar icon and Annotation Toolbar for the Media Manager
Defining this field as yes causes the following additional subfields to display for definition:
Initial Annotation ToolMultimedia Rubber Stamp(s)
No – Does not allow an object to be annotated within the Capture/Edit Client.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Initial Annotation Tool
Purpose Defines the annotation tool that is pre-selected when the Image Manager client application is launched. This field displays only when the Allow Annotation? subfield of this data element is defined as yes.
Input Single selection from the following hard-coded options:
None
Display Format (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
158 QuadraMed Corporation
Select annotation (pointer)
Freehand line (pen)
Highlighter
Straight line
Hollow rectangle
Filled rectangle
Text
Attach-a-note
Rubber stamp
Defaults to none
System Use Displays this annotation tool on the Annotation toolbar in the Image Manager Capture/Edit Client, as a pre-selected icon.
Displays this annotation tool on the Annotation toolbar in the Media Manager Capture/Edit Client.
NOTE: In the Media Manager client application, the initial annotation tool defined in this subfield does not display as a pre-selected icon.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Multimedia Rubber Stamp(s)
Purpose Defines the rubber stamp (that is, predefined text or symbols) that is available when the Capture/Edit client application is initiated. A rubber stamp (that is, patient identification number, date/time stamp, arrow, dot, and so on) can be placed on an image as an annotation. This field displays only when the Allow Annotation? subfield of this data element is defined as yes.
Input Insert/Delete Editor
Single selection
Links from the Multimedia Rubber Stamp Table, ^mmt(“rs”)
System Use Displays the defined rubber stamp definition for selection when the Annotation toolbar, Rubber Stamp icon is accessed from the Capture/Edit client application.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Initial Annotation Tool (Continued)
Chapter 40 Generic Multimedia Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 159
Additional Object Data String
Purpose Image Manager Server-based application – Defines a user-defined data string that enables the System to configure the way an image within a third-party client application or an image server is handled.
Media Manager Client-based application – This subfield can define scanning operation control for the QuadraMed CPR Media Manager client application that overrides the definition of the Media Manager, File menu, Preferences menu point, TWAIN tab.
Input Free-text
NOTE: The exact format required for the values entered into this field is determined by QuadraMed.
Image Manager Server-based application – The functionality that can be achieved with this field is determined by the application-programming interface that is available for the specific image server or third-party client application.
Depending on the image server software at a given installation of the Image Manager or the Media Manager, this field may not be used at all. This field should be left blank, unless specified by QuadraMed.
Media Manager Client-based application – The scanning operation of the Media Manager client application is controlled by TWAIN settings.
The string defined in this subfield can be used by QuadraMed CPR to pass TWAIN settings to the new Media Manager client application.
The m_extradata string for the Media Manager client application takes the form: <parameter_name>=<value> and uses the ^ character to delimit the pairs.
The string can be prepared as in the following sample:
Image_byte_type=GRAY (8bit)
^x_resolution=120
^y_resolution=120
^select_TWAIN_source=true
^show_device_ui=false
System Use Image Manager Server-based application – Provides a means to pass parameters to an image server or a third-party image client. These parameters enable the System to configure the way an image within a third-party client application or an image server is handled.
Media Manager Client-based application – This subfield can override the following Preferences defined in the Media Manager client application, File menu, Preference menu point:
Image byte type
Default resolutions (that is, horizontal and vertical resolution (dpi))
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
160 QuadraMed Corporation
TWAIN source (that is, the image acquisition device used if the Media Manager client application is not used for image acquisition)
Whether or not the image acquisition device’s user interface displays for configuration to the user
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Additional Generated Data String
Purpose Defines the means for a healthcare facility to pass non-object data (that is, employee ID, and so on) to a third-party imaging client, if necessary. This subfield displays only when the Multimedia Type Constants field of this data element is defined as Scanned/Photographic Imaging. This subfield is not supported by the Media Manager application.
Input Report Definition
This subfield should be defined with a report using the Report Formatter Hook Table, ^arfh, MM Additional Data hook
Links from the Hierarchical Filing Structure (HFS)NOTE: The functionality that can be achieved with this field is determined by the application-programming interface that is available for the specific image server or third-party client application. Depending on the image server software at a given installation of the Image Manager or Media Manager, this field may not be used at all. This field should be left blank, unless specified by QuadraMed.
System Use Provides a way for data not related to a multimedia object to be passed to the object server in a facility. For example, a facility can require data regarding the current user to be captured.
Information such as employee ID, facility ID, Visit ID, and event ID can be passed through the Report Formatter Hook Table, ^arfh, MM Additional Data hook to a report through the use of this subfield. The data in the report is returned in similar name=value pairs and is concatenated onto the Additional Object Data string defined in the Additional Object Data String subfield and then passed to the third-party client or server.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Suppress Printing?
Purpose Defines whether an image collected in the field created from this data element and associated with a documented event is printed from the Chart Review Print routine.
NOTE: This subfield is used only in conjunction with the Media Manager client application. This functionality is not available in the Image Manager server-based application.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
Additional Object Data String (Continued)
Chapter 40 Generic Multimedia Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 161
ExpressionsThe following fields display when the Expressions field is accessed:
System Use Yes – Indicates image collected in the field created from this data element and associated with a documented event are excluded from printing in the Chart Review Print routine.
No – Indicates all image collected in the field created from this data element and associated with a documented event are always printed in the Chart Review Print routine.
NOTE: This does not affect Report Formatter Dictionary Table, ^arfd, screen driver reports and screen prints.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Image Print Size
Purpose Defines the size of the image that prints from the Chart Review Print routine.
NOTE: This subfield is used only in conjunction with the Media Manager client application. This functionality is not available in the Image Manager server-based application.
Input Integer representing percentage (1-100% Limit) (Defaults to 100%)
System Use Displays the image on the page according to the size defined in this subfield.
NOTE: The image should be defined to allow room for the header (event information) to display.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Edit Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field can be edited by the user. This security check is in addition to any hard-coded checks in the data element.
Display Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field can be accessed on the screen driver on the user side. This security check is in addition to any hard-coded display checks in the data element.
Allowed Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether data can be entered into the data element field, and whether previously defined data is cleared when data cannot be entered. When allowed security fails, the field cannot be accessed and the System clears any data defined in the field.
Required Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field is required. This status is in addition to any hard-coded checks in the data element.
Suppress Printing? (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
162 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 163
Chapter 41
Generic Name Data Element
OverviewThe Generic Name data element is used to create a field that allows a name to be entered during insurance processing. This data element is to be used only when the other data elements within the insurance/payor data dictionary do not apply.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Generic Name data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Generic Name data element:
Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Variations The Generic Name data element consists of the following variations:
Name Without Suffix – This variation does not display the Family Suffix Options during data entry. The following fields display for the Name Without Suffix variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierLengthStorage ReferenceStandard – This variation displays the list of Family Suffix Options when the Generic Name is being defined. The following fields display for the Standard variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierLengthStorage Reference
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
164 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Generic Name data element is accessed, the System prompts for a name to be entered. The name must be entered in the standard name format (that is, Last, First M). Depending on the variation selected, after the name is entered, the System can display a list of Family Suffix Options and prompt for one to be selected. Family Suffix Options are defined in the Family Suffix Table, ^rt("fs").
The System can copy forward generic insurance data from a previous visit into the current visit when the following conditions are met:
The insurance is copied forward during one of the following processes:
Adding a new visit
Copying a previous visit into a new visit
Changing visit types during a visit add
Converting a visit
The field created from this data element has information defined.
The Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi"), Copy Data Forward? field is defined as yes for the option defined in the Storage Reference Constants field of this data element.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 41 Generic Name Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 165
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Storage Reference
Purpose Defines the location in which the information defined in this data element is stored.
Input Single selection
Links from the Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Required
System Use Determines where the name defined in this data element field is stored.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
166 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 167
Chapter 42
Generic Other Facility Data Element
OverviewThe Generic Other Facility data element is used to create a field that allows an other facility to be defined during insurance processing. This data element is to be used only when the other data elements within the insurance/payor data dictionary do not apply.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM the Generic Other Facility data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO the Generic Other Facility data element:
Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad")Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Required Status The required status for this data element is database-defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ̂ rt("ipp"), Data Element Definition Screen, Required? field, as well as in the Required Expr Expressions field.
NOTE: When both the Required? field and a required expression are defined, the System uses the most restrictive required status.
Variations The Generic Other Facility data element consists of the following variations:
Address – This variation displays the name, address, and telephone number of the other facility in the data element field, provided the information is defined in the Other Facility Table, ^rt("of"), and the data element field is defined with enough lines to display this information. When a free-text generic other facility is entered, this variation prompts for a telephone number to be entered or to choose none and then for an address to be defined.
The following fields display for the Address variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierStorage Reference
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
168 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Generic Other Facility data element is accessed, the System, depending on how the Use Partial Name Match? Constants field of this data element is defined, can prompt for a partial name to be entered or automatically display the list of Other Facility Options. An other facility can be selected or entered as free-text. Other Facility Options are defined in the Other Facility Table, ^rt("of").
When a free-text generic other facility is entered, the System, depending on the variation selected, can prompt to enter a telephone number, or to choose none. The System accepts standard telephone formats. Once a telephone number is entered, or the none option is chosen, the System displays an Address Collection Screen. The screen that displays is defined in the Address Collection Screen Constants field of this data element.
The System can copy forward generic insurance data from a previous visit into the current visit when the following conditions are met:
The insurance is copied forward during one of the following processes:
Adding a new visit
Copying a previous visit into a new visit
Changing visit types during a visit add
Converting a visit
The field created from this data element has information defined.
The Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi"), Copy Data Forward? field is defined as yes for the option defined in the Storage Reference Constants field of this data element.
Address Collection ScreenUse Partial Name Match?No Address – This variation displays only the other facility name. The following fields display for the No Address variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierStorage ReferenceUse Partial Name Match?
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 42 Generic Other Facility Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 169
ConstantsThe following fields can display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Storage Reference
Purpose Defines the location in which the information defined in this data element is stored.
Input Single selection
Links from the Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Required
System Use Stores the other facility defined in this data element field in the specified location.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Address Collection Screen
Purpose Defines the Address Collection Screen that displays to collect the address on the user's side when a free-text other facility is being defined.
This field displays for definition only when the Address variation is defined.
Input Single selection
Links from the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad")
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
170 QuadraMed Corporation
ExpressionsThe following fields display when the Expressions field is accessed:
System Use Displays this Address Collection Screen when a free-text other facility is being defined.
The Address Collection Screen displays for definition after the telephone number of the free-text other facility is defined.
When a screen is not defined in this field, the System displays the screen defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Address Collection Driver field.
For a complete description of address screens, see Chapter 1, Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad") in the Address Collection Driver Table Reference.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Use Partial Name Match?
Purpose Defines whether a partial name match is allowed when defining the other facility.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
System Use Yes – Indicates the System prompts for a partial name to be entered when this data element field is selected during insurance processing.
No – Indicates a partial name is not accepted as input when defining the other facility.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Default Expr Defines an expression that determines a predefined value entered into the data element field.
Edit Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field can be edited by the user.
Display Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field can be accessed on the screen driver on the user's side. When display security fails, the selection number and data for the field are starred out.
Address Collection Screen (Continued)
Chapter 42 Generic Other Facility Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 171
Allowed Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether data can be entered into the data element field. When allowed security fails, the field cannot be accessed and the System clears any defined data in the field.
Required Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field is required.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
172 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 173
Chapter 43
Generic Selection Screen/Tree Data Element
OverviewThe Generic Selection Screen/Tree data element is used to create a field that accesses a specific selection screen/tree. Selection screens/trees are defined in the Selection Screen/Tree Table, ^nts. This data element is to be used only when the other data elements within the insurance/payor data dictionary do not apply.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Generic Selection Screen/Tree data element is accessed, the System displays the selection screen or tree defined in the Screen Type/Name Constants field and prompts for an option to be selected.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Generic Selection Screen/Tree data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Generic Selection Screen/Tree data element:
Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")Selection Screen/Tree Table, ^nts
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
174 QuadraMed Corporation
The System can copy forward generic insurance data from a previous visit into the current visit when the following conditions are met:
The insurance is copied forward during one of the following processes:
Adding a new visit
Copying a previous visit into a new visit
Changing visit types during a visit add
Converting a visit
The field created from this data element has information defined.
The Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi"), Copy Data Forward? field is defined as yes for the option defined in the Storage Reference Constants field of this data element.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Screen Type/Name
Purpose Defines whether the list that displays for selection is a screen or tree, and links a selection screen/tree to this data element.
Input (S) Select screen
(T) Tree
Chapter 43 Generic Selection Screen/Tree Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 175
Partial name match
Single selection
Links from the Selection Screen/Tree Table, ^nts, Result Entry/Assessment subfile
Required
System Use (S) Select screen – Displays the defined selection screen when this data element field is selected.
(T) Tree – Displays the defined selection tree when the data element field is selected.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Window Preference
Purpose Defines the amount of screen space allotted to display the selected list.
Input Integer
(E) Entire screen
Defaults to entire screen
System Use Clears the number of lines specified to display the defined list. Lines are counted from the first line above the screen bottom.
The space cleared for displaying the list is the space allotted for the message screen itself. The window size should be large enough to display a significant portion of the list, but small enough to minimize the amount of the message screen cleared to display the list.
(E) Entire screen – Clears the entire screen.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Multi-Select?
Purpose Defines whether multiple list items can be selected.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
Screen Type/Name (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
176 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use Yes – Indicates that multiple items, separated by commas, can be selected. When free-text is enabled, the System accepts multiple free-text entries. By convention, when multiple selection is allowed, the descriptor on the transaction line should be suffixed with (s). Free-text is enabled in the Allow Free-Text? Constants field.
No – Indicates only one item can be selected or one free-text entry can be entered.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Allow Free-Text?
Purpose Defines whether free-text is allowed in addition to, or in place of, a selection from the list.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
System Use Yes – Indicates free-text is allowed in addition to, or in place of, a selection from the list. By convention, when free-text is enable, the message modifier should be suffixed with the phrase or Enter free-text.
No – Indicates a free-text entry is not allowed. The System displays an invalid format error when free-text data is entered.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Storage Reference
Purpose Defines the location in which the information defined in this data element is stored.
Input Single selection
Links from the Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Required
System Use Determines where an option selected from the selection screen/tree data is stored.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Multi-Select? (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 177
Chapter 44
Generic Table Selection Data Element
OverviewThe Generic Table Selection data element is used to support data entry during insurance processing by the selection of one or more items from a generic table. Generic tables are defined in the Generic Table Table, ^ntt. This data element is to be used only when the other data elements within the insurance/payor data dictionary do not apply.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Generic Table Selection data element is accessed, the System displays a list of options. The options that display are defined for the selection table defined in the Selection Table Constants field of this data element and linked to the group defined in the Selection Group Constants field of this data element.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM the Generic Table Selection data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO the Generic Table Selection data element:
Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")Generic Table Table, ^ntt
Required Status The required status for this data element is database-defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ̂ rt("ipp"), Data Element Definition Screen, Required? field, as well as in the Required Expr Expressions field.
NOTE: When both the Required? field and a required expression are defined, the System Uses the most restrictive required status.
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
178 QuadraMed Corporation
Selection tables are defined in the Generic Table Table, ^ntt. A group is defined for an option in the Generic Table Table, ^ntt, Data Elements subfile, Group List field. When the defined table has multiple options, the System displays an expand icon at the bottom of the screen, indicating the EXPD key can be pressed to display all the Data Element Options defined for the selection table, regardless of group.
An option can be selected from either list. When the Allow Partial Name? Constants field of this data element is defined as yes, a partial name or lookup name can also be entered. Lookup names are defined for an option in the Generic Table Table, ^ntt, Data Elements subfile, Lookup Name(s) field. Entries are evaluated by the System as follows:
When the user enters a number, the System attempts to match the entered number with a selection option. When a match is found, the selection's internal code is stored in the System and the corresponding option name displays in the field. When a selection match is not found, the System attempts to match the number with a lookup name, then a partial name. When all checks fail, the System displays an error message.
When the user enters an alphabetic/numeric combination, the System attempts to match a lookup name or partial name, or store the entry as free-text, in that order. An entry is stored as free-text only when the Allow Free-Text? Constants field of this data element is defined as yes.
When the Multi-Select? Constants field of this data element is defined as yes, the System allows multiple entries to be entered/selected. Each entry is evaluated as described above. The System stores either the internal code (when a selection, lookup name, or partial name match is found), or free-text (when no match is found), then processes the next entry.
The System can copy forward generic insurance data from a previous visit into the current visit when the following conditions are met:
The insurance is copied forward during one of the following processes:
Adding a new visit
Copying a previous visit into a new visit
Changing visit types during a visit add
Converting a visit
The field created from this data element has information defined.
The Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi"), Copy Data Forward? field is defined as yes for the option defined in the Storage Reference Constants field of this data element.
A numeric entry cannot be interpreted as free-text. Since the System stores the data by internal code, it cannot differentiate between a free-text entry of 10 and an internal code of 10. However, free-text entries can contain numbers, provided one character is non-numeric.
Chapter 44 Generic Table Selection Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 179
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Selection Table
Purpose Defines the table associated with this data element.
Input Single selection
Links from the Generic Table Table, ^ntt
Required
System Use Displays the Data Element Options defined for this table when the field created from this data element is accessed during insurance processing. When no data elements are defined for the linked table, the System displays a No options currently defined! message when the field created from this data element is accessed.
When this field is defined, the System displays the Selection Group Constants field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Selection Group
Purpose Defines the group that determines the data elements that display when the field created from this data element is accessed. This field displays only when the Selection Table Constants field is defined.
Input Single selection
Links from the Group Options defined for the selection table defined in the Selection Table Constants field.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
180 QuadraMed Corporation
Group Options are defined for a selection table in the Generic Table Table, ^ntt, Group Codes subfile.
System Use Determines the data elements that display when the field created from this data element is accessed. The System displays only those data elements defined for the selection table that are linked to this group. A group is defined for the data element in the Generic Table Table, ^ntt, Data Elements subfile, Group List field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Window Preference
Purpose Defines the amount of screen space allotted to display the list of options.
Input Integer
(E) Entire screen
Defaults to entire screen
System Use Displays the list of options in a window the number of lines defined in this field. Lines are counted from the first line above the screen bottom.
The optimal window size is the smallest window that properly displays the list on one screen. However, if the list must be displayed on more than one screen, the window size should be large enough to display a significant portion of the list, but small enough to minimize the message screen cleared to display the list.
(E) Entire screen – Uses the entire screen to display the list. The entire screen is equivalent to a window size of 17 lines.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Multi-Select?
Purpose Defines whether multiple options can be selected from the list.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
System Use Yes – Allows multiple options to be selected. Each option must be separated by a comma (Example: 1,2). When multiple selections are allowed, the System appends the message modifier with an (s) (Example: Select option(s)).
No – Allows only one option to be selected.
Selection Group (Continued)
Chapter 44 Generic Table Selection Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 181
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Allow Free-Text?
Purpose Defines whether free-text data is allowed in addition to, or in place of, a selection from the table.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
System Use Yes – Allows free-text data to be entered in addition to or in place of selecting an option from the list. When free-text data is allowed, the System adds a free-text processing option to the transaction line that displays with the list of options.
No – Indicates free-text is not allowed. The System allows only an option to be selected or a partial name or lookup name to be entered.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Allow Partial Name?
Purpose Defines whether an option can be identified by a partial name or lookup name.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
System Use Yes – Allows an option to be identified by a partial name or lookup name. Lookup names are defined for a data element option in the Generic Table Table, ^ntt, Data Elements subfile, Lookup Name(s) field.
Defining this field as yes causes the System to add a partial name processing option to the transaction line that displays with the list of options.
No – Indicates an option can be identified only by selecting an option from the list or, when the Allow Free-Text? Constants field is defined as yes, by entering free-text.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Multi-Select? (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
182 QuadraMed Corporation
ExpressionsThe following fields display when the Expressions field is accessed:
Storage Reference
Purpose Defines the location in which the information defined in this data element is stored. For a complete description of storage locations, see Chapter 16, Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt(“gi”) in the Registration/Visit Tables Reference.
Input Single selection
Links from the Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Required
System Use Determines where the option selected in the field created from this data element is stored.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Default Expr Defines an expression that determines a predefined value entered into the data element field.
Edit Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field can be edited by the user.
Display Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field can be accessed on the screen driver on the user's side. When display security fails, the selection number and data for the field are starred out.
Allowed Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether data can be entered into the data element field. When allowed security fails, the field cannot be accessed and the System clears any defined data in the field.
Required Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field is required.
QuadraMed Corporation 183
Chapter 45
Generic Telephone Data Element
OverviewThe Generic Telephone data element is used to create a field that allows a telephone number to be entered during insurance processing. This data element is to be used only when the other data elements within the insurance/payor data dictionary do not apply.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Generic Telephone data element is accessed, the System prompts for a telephone number to be entered. QuadraMed CPR accepts standard telephone formats. The System can copy forward generic insurance data from a previous visit into the current visit when the following conditions are met:
The insurance is copied forward during one of the following processes:
Adding a new visit
Copying a previous visit into a new visit
Changing visit types during a visit add
Converting a visit
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Generic Telephone data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Generic Telephone data element:
Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
184 QuadraMed Corporation
The field created from this data element has information defined.
The Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi"), Copy Data Forward? field is defined as yes for the option defined in the Storage Reference Constants field of this data element.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Storage Reference
Purpose Defines the location in which the information defined in this data element is stored.
Input Single selection
Links from the Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt("gi")
Required
System Use Determines where the telephone number defined in this data element field is stored.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 185
Chapter 46
Group Number Data Element
OverviewThe Group Number data element is used to create a field that collects the subscriber's group number. The group number is the identification number of the group.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Group Number data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Group Number data element:
None
Variations The Group Number data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays an XP icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification ExpressionNo Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
186 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Group Number data element is accessed, the System prompts for data to be entered. Once data has been entered, the System checks the entered data against the defined format. When the entered format is invalid, the System displays an error message.
ConstantsThe following fields can display when the Constants field is accessed:
The following fields can display for the No Expand variation:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
The System defaults the information into this data element field from the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip"), Employer Definitions subfile, Group Number level, Insurance Group field, only when the insurance is defined through the Choose employer(E) processing option.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 46 Group Number Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 187
Display Type
Purpose Defines how the data element is to be entered.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to format
System Use (F) Format – Displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) field when the data element is accessed.
Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the valid format.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a format, the following information must be used:
A – Defines the alphabetic characters used in the format.
9 – Defines the numbers used in the format.
Punctuation marks – Defines a punctuation mark as itself.
For example, when the format is defined as AA-999, a valid entry is CD-123.
System Use Compares the entered data against the defined format and displays an error message when the entered data is in an invalid format.
Displays the format, when defined, in the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip"), Employer Definitions subfile, Group Number level, Insurance Group field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
188 QuadraMed Corporation
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the formatted entry is displayed.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the length of the longest format specified.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the users side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check, such as numbers must start with a specific number or set of numbers (Example: 12 or 1812).
Input Mumps code/operations (that is, !,|, $s)
Data values (that is, 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates/performs the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered into the System inaccurately and an error message displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the users side until the screen containing this data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 189
Chapter 47
Insurance Verified Data Element
OverviewThe Insurance Verified data element is used to create a field that allows documentation of whether a patient's insurance is accepted or rejected during the insurance verification process.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Insurance Verified data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Insurance Verified data element:
Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs")
Variations The Insurance Verified data element consists of the following variations:
Choose – This variation indicates to the System that the Insurance Verified Options display in the transaction line defined in the Prompt Constants field. The following fields display for the Choose variation when the Constants field is accessed:
PromptFace SheetValuesScreen – This variation indicates to the System that the Insurance Verified Options display as a selection screen. The following fields display for the Screen variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierFace SheetDisplay Text
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
190 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from an Insurance Verified data element is accessed, the System displays verification options and prompts for one to be chosen or selected. Until the verification status is defined, the System defaults to not verified.
ConstantsThe following fields can display when the Constants field is accessed:
Prompt
Purpose Defines the transaction line that displays when this data element is selected during insurance processing.
Input Free-text beginning with the verb Choose.
Each choose value must be included in the prompt. For example, if the following values are defined:
The transaction line (prompt) should be defined as:
Choose not verified(N), accepted(A) or rejected(R)
System Use Displays this transaction line when a field created from this data element is accessed during insurance processing.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Face Sheet
Purpose Defines the face sheet data element into which information is passed.
Input Partial name match
Single selection
Links from the Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs"), Categories/Data Elements subfile
VALUE DISPLAY TEXT MEANING
N Not verified not verified
A Accepted verification accepted
R Rejected verification rejected
Chapter 47 Insurance Verified Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 191
System Use Stores this value in the face sheet data element, replacing the previously stored results.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Values
Purpose Defines the character values that are accepted as input.
Input Value – Defines an allowable choice. Only one alphabetic character can be entered, and each value must have a unique letter. The System automatically capitalizes lower-case letters.
Display Text – Defines the text associated with the defined value. This is a free-text entry.
Meaning – Hard-coded text associated with the value and display text.
Required
System Use When a value is chosen from the transaction line, the System displays the information defined as the display text for that value.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Face Sheet (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
192 QuadraMed Corporation
Display Text
Purpose Defines the character values that are accepted as input.
Input Display Text – Defines the text that displays for selection. This is a free-text entry.
Meaning – Hard-coded text associated with the display text.
(M) Move
System Use When a field created from the Insurance Verified data element is accessed, the System displays the defined display text on the selection screen.
(M) Move – Allows the order of the display text to be changed. This modified order is reflected in the selection screen that displays to the user.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 193
Chapter 48
Military Base Data Element
OverviewThe Military Base data element is used to create an insurance field that defines the military base to which the patient is stationed.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Military Base data element is accessed, the System displays a list of Military Base Options and prompts for one to be selected, or for free-text to be entered. Military Base Options are defined in the Military Base Table, ^rt("mib").
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Military Base data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Military Base data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
194 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 195
Chapter 49
Military Branch of Service Data Element
OverviewThe Military Branch of Service data element is used to create an insurance field that defines the military branch of service to which the patient is enlisted.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Military Branch of Service data element is accessed, the System displays a list of Military Branch of Service Options and prompts for one to be selected. Military Branch of Service Options are defined in the Military Branch of Service Table, ^rt("mit").
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Military Branch of Service data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Military Branch of Service data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
196 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 197
Chapter 50
Military Rank Data Element
OverviewThe Military Rank data element is used to create an insurance field that defines the military rank of the patient.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Military Rank data element is accessed, the System displays a list of Military Rank Options and prompts for one to be selected, or for free-text to be entered. Military Rank Options are defined in the Military Rank Table, ^rt("mir").
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Military Rank data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Military Rank data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
198 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 199
Chapter 51
Military Reason Data Element
OverviewThe Military Reason data element is used to create an insurance field that defines the reason a non-military hospital was selected for the patient's admission.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Military Reason data element is accessed, the System displays a list of Military Reason Options and prompts for one to be selected, or for free-text to be entered. Military Reason Options are defined in the Military Reason Table, ^rt("mie").
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Military Reason data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Military Reason data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
200 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 201
Chapter 52
Military Status Data Element
OverviewThe Military Status data element is used to create an insurance field that defines the military status of the patient.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Military Status data element is accessed, the System displays a list of Military Status Options and prompts for one to be selected. Military Status Options are defined in the Military Status Table, ^rt("mis").
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Military Status data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Military Status data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
202 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 203
Chapter 53
Other Facility Data Element
OverviewThe Other Facility data element is used to create an insurance field that defines another facility, not on the QuadraMed CPR System, to/from which patients can be transferred.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Other Facility data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, displays a list of Other Facility Options and prompts for one to be selected, or for free-text to be entered. Other Facility Options are defined in the Other Facility Table, ^rt("of").
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Other Facility data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Other Facility data element:
None
Variations The Other Facility data element consists of the following variations:
Allow Free-Text – This variation causes the or Enter free-text option to be added to the transaction line. The following field displays for the Allow Free-Text variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierStandard – This variation does not allow free-text to be entered. The following field displays for the Standard variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
204 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 205
Chapter 54
Other Facility Stay End Date Data Element
OverviewThe Other Facility Stay End Date data element is used to create a field that defines the date the patient's visit ended at another facility.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Other Facility Stay End Date data element is accessed, the System prompts for a date to be entered. This data element is starred out ( ), making it inaccessible, until the Other Facility data element is defined. The System accepts the following date formats:
t (today) – Displays the current System date.
t +/- offset – Displays the current System date plus or minus a valid offset. The System accepts the following offsets:
(n) number – Indicates the offset is a number of days, indicated by n. For example, t+1 is tomorrow and t-1 is yesterday.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Other Facility Stay End Date data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Other Facility Stay End Date data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
206 QuadraMed Corporation
nw – Indicates the offset is a number of weeks, indicated by n. For example, t+3w is three weeks or 21 days in the future.
nm – Indicates the offset is a number of months, indicated by n. When the date offset is a month, only the month and year display. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+3m is March 1992.
ny – Indicates the offset is a number of years, indicated by n. When the offset is a year, only the year displays. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+2y is 1993.
Acceptable date formats are determined by the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters level, Date Parsing field.
Depending on the Date Parsing Option selected, the System accepts the date in the following formats:
U.S.A.
The month (m), day (d), and year (y) can be defined in the following formats:
mm-dd-yy
mm/dd/yy
dd mmm yy
dd mmm yyyy
The month and year can be defined in the following formats:
mm/yy
mm-yy
mmm yyyy
The year can be defined as yyyy
When a month is defined in a three character format (i.e., mmm), the input is alphabetic characters. When the month is defined in a two character format (i.e., mm), the input is numeric.
Canada – Canadian date parsing interprets the first number of an unformatted date string as a day rather than a month.
International – Currently not used.
Chapter 54 Other Facility Stay End Date Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 207
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Past
Purpose Defines the number of days in the past that will be accepted for a date entry.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
System Use When a past date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is previous to the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date prior to 29 October 1992.
No limit – The System accepts all past dates.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future
Purpose Defines the number of days in the future that will be accepted for a date entry.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
208 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When a future date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is greater than the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date greater than 02 November 1992.
No limit – The System accepts all future dates.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 209
Chapter 55
Other Facility Stay Start Date Data Element
OverviewThe Other Facility Stay Start Date data element is used to create a field that defines the date the patient's visit began at another facility.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Other Facility Stay Start Date data element is accessed, the System prompts for a date to be entered. This data element is starred out ( ** ), making it inaccessible, until the Other Facility data element is defined. The System accepts the following date formats:
t (today) – Displays the current System date.
t +/- offset – Displays the current System date plus or minus a valid offset. The System accepts the following offsets:
(n) number – Indicates the offset is a number of days, indicated by n. For example, t+1 is tomorrow and t-1 is yesterday.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Other Facility Stay End Date data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Other Facility Stay End Date data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
210 QuadraMed Corporation
nw – Indicates the offset is a number of weeks, indicated by n. For example, t+3w is three weeks or 21 days in the future.
nm – Indicates the offset is a number of months, indicated by n. When the date offset is a month, only the month and year display. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+3m is March 1992.
ny – Indicates the offset is a number of years, indicated by n. When the offset is a year, only the year displays. For example, when the current System date is 17 December 91, t+2y is 1993.
Acceptable date formats are determined by the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters level, Date Parsing field. Depending on the Date Parsing Option selected, the System accepts the date in the following formats:
U.S.A.
The month (m), day (d), and year (y) can be defined in the following formats:
mm-dd-yy
mm/dd/yy
dd mmm yy
dd mmm yyyy
The month and year can be defined in the following formats:
mm/yy
mm-yy
mmm yyyy
The year can be defined as yyyy
When a month is defined in a three character format (that is, mmm), the input is alphabetic characters. When the month is defined in a two character format (that is, mm), the input is numeric.
Canada – Canadian date parsing interprets the first number of an unformatted date string as a day rather than a month.
International – Currently not used.
Chapter 55 Other Facility Stay Start Date Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 211
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Past
Purpose Defines the number of days in the past that will be accepted for a date entry.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
System Use When a past date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is previous to the current System date minus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date prior to 29 October 1992.
No limit – The System accepts all past dates.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future
Purpose Defines the number of days in the future that will be accepted for a date entry.
Input Integer
Defaults to No limit
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
212 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When a future date is entered into this data element field, the System checks the entered date against the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field. When the date is greater than the current System date plus the number of days defined in this field, the System displays an error message and prompts for another date.
For example, if today is 31 October 1992, and this field is defined as 2, the System does not accept a date greater than 02 November 1992.
No limit – The System accepts all future dates.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Days In Future (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 213
Chapter 56
Payor Number Data Element
OverviewThe Payor Number data element is used to create an insurance field that defines the code number of the insurance. The payor number is used by financial systems to identify and report insurance/payors. Financial systems typically identify the insurance/payor by payor number/code instead of by name.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM the Payor Number data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO the Payor Number data element:
None
Required Status The required status for this data element is database-defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ̂ rt("ipp"), Data Element Definition Screen, Required? field, as well as in the Required Expr Expressions field.
NOTE: When both the Required? field and a required expression are defined, the System uses the most restrictive required status.
Variations The Payor Number data element consists of the following variations:
Display Only – This variation indicates the payor number displays for informational purposes only and cannot be edited. There are no constants for this variation.
Standard – This variation allows the payor number to be edited. The following field displays for the Standard variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
214 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Payor Number data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, can display a list of Payor Number Options and prompt for one to be selected. Payor Number Options are defined in the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip"), Facility Definitions subfile, Miscellaneous level, Visit Specific Data field, Payor Number(s) subfield. When only one payor number is defined in the Payor Number(s) subfield, the System defaults that number into the field created from this data element. When more than one payor number is defined, the System displays a list of Payor Number Options and prompts for one to be selected.
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
ExpressionsThe following fields display when the Expressions field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Default Expr Defines an expression that determines a predefined value entered into the data element field.
Edit Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field can be edited by the user.
Display Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field can be accessed on the screen driver on the user's side. When display security fails, the selection number and data for the field are starred out.
Chapter 56 Payor Number Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 215
Allowed Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether data can be entered into the data element field. When allowed security fails, the field cannot be accessed and the System clears any defined data in the field.
Required Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field is required.
Edit Check Exprs Defines an ordered list of expressions that determine whether the data entered into the data element field is valid.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
216 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 217
Chapter 57
Plan Number Data Element
OverviewThe Plan Number data element is used to define the patient's plan number. The plan number is associated with the plan of benefits provided by the insurance company.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Plan Number data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Plan Number data element:
None
Variations The Plan Number data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays an expand icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the Expand variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)LengthDisplay Maximum LengthVerification Expression
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
218 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Plan Number data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, either prompts for data to be entered or an option to be selected.
ConstantsThe following fields can display when the Constants field is accessed:
No Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays the format defined in Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the No Expand variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
The System defaults the information into this data element field from the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip"), Employer Definitions subfile, Group Number level, Insurance Plan Number field, only when the insurance is defined through the Choose employer(E) processing option.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 57 Plan Number Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 219
Display Type
Purpose Defines how the data element is to be entered.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to format
System Use (F) Format – Displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field when the data element is accessed. Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the valid format.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a format, the following information can be entered:
A – Defines the alphabetic characters used in the format.
9 – Defines the numbers used in the format.
Punctuation marks – Defines a punctuation mark as itself.
For example, when the format is defined as AA-999, a valid entry is CD-123.
System Use Compares the entered data against the defined format and displays an error message when the entered data is in an invalid format.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
220 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the entry displays.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the length of the longest format specified.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check, such as numbers must start with a specific number or set of numbers (Example: 12 or 1812).
Input ULTIMUMPS™ code/operations (that is, !,|,$s)
For a complete description of ULTIMUMPS™ expressions, see Chapter 5, Calculations/Expressions in the Introduction to CPR Tables.
Data values (that is, 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates/performs the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered into the System incorrectly and an error message displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Length (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 221
Chapter 58
Pre-Auth Data Element
OverviewThe Pre-Auth data element is used to create a field that defines the type of pre-authorization, if any, that is required.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Pre-Auth data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, either prompts for a status to be chosen or displays a list of options and prompts for one to be selected. The Pre-Authorization Options that display for selection are hard-coded.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Pre-Auth data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Pre-Auth data element:
None
Variations The Pre-Auth data element consists of the following variations:
Choose – This variation indicates to the System that the options display in the transaction line. The following field displays for the Choose variation when the Constants field is accessed:Message ModifierScreen – This variation indicates to the System that the options display as a selection screen. The following field displays for the Screen variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
222 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 223
Chapter 59
Pre-Auth Number Data Element
OverviewThe Pre-Auth Number data element is used to define an insurance field that collects the number supplied by the patient's insurance company to confirm the pre-authorization.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Pre-Auth Number data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Pre-Auth Number data element:
None
Variations The Pre-Auth Number data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays an expand icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the Expand variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)LengthDisplay Maximum LengthVerification Expression
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
224 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Pre-Auth Number data element is accessed, the System prompts for data to be entered.
ConstantsThe following fields can display when the Constants field is accessed:
No Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field.
The following fields can display for the No Expand variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)LengthDisplay Maximum LengthVerification Expression
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 59 Pre-Auth Number Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 225
Display Type
Purpose Defines how the data element is to be entered.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to format
System Use (F) Format – Displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field when the data element is accessed. Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the valid format.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a format, the following information can be entered:
A – Defines the alphabetic characters used in the format.
9 – Defines the numbers used in the format.
Punctuation marks – Defines a punctuation mark as itself.
For example, when the format is defined as AA-999, a valid entry is CD-123.
System Use Compares the entered data against the defined format and displays an error message when the entered data is in an invalid format.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
226 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the entry displays.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the length of the longest format specified.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check, such as numbers must start with a specific number or set of numbers (Example: 12 or 1812).
Input ULTIMUMPS code/operations (that is, !,|,$s)
For a complete description of ULTIMUMPS expressions, see Chapter 5, Calculations/Expressions in the Introduction to CPR Tables.
Data values (that is, 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates/performs the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered into the System incorrectly and an error message displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Length (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 227
Chapter 60
Pre-Auth Second Opinion Flag Data Element
OverviewThe Pre-Auth Second Opinion Flag data element is used to create a field that defines whether the insurance company requires a second opinion before authorizing the patient's visit.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Pre-Auth Second Opinion Flag data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Pre-Auth Second Opinion Flag data element:
Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs")
Variations The Pre-Auth Second Opinion Flag data element consists of the following variations:
Choose – This variation indicates to the System that the options display in the transaction line defined in the Prompt Constants field. The following fields display for the Choose variation when the Constants field is accessed:
PromptFace SheetValuesScreen – This variation indicates to the System that the options display as a selection screen. The following fields display for the Screen variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierFace SheetDisplay Text
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
228 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Pre-Auth Second Opinion Flag data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, either prompts for a status to be chosen or displays a list of options and prompts for one to be selected.
ConstantsThe following fields can display when the Constants field is accessed:
Prompt
Purpose Defines the transaction line that displays when this data element is selected during insurance processing.
Input Free-text beginning with the verb Choose.
Each choose value must be included in the prompt. For example, if the following values are defined:
The transaction line (prompt) should be defined as:
Choose no second opinion(N) or second opinion(Y)
System Use Displays this transaction line when the data element is selected during insurance processing.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Face Sheet
Purpose Defines the face sheet data element into which information is passed.
Input Partial name match
Single selection
Links from the Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs"), Categories/Data Elements subfile
System Use Stores this value in the face sheet data element, replacing the previously stored results.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
VALUE DISPLAY TEXT MEANING
N No no second opinion
Y Yes second opinion
Chapter 60 Pre-Auth Second Opinion Flag Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 229
Values
Purpose Defines the character values that are accepted as input.
Input Value – Defines an allowable choice. Only one alphabetic character can be entered, and each value must have a unique letter. The System automatically capitalizes lower case letters.
Display text – Defines the text associated with the defined value. This is a free-text entry.
Meaning – Hard-coded text associated with the value and display text.
Required
System Use When a value is chosen from the transaction line, the System displays the defined display text for that value.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Text
Purpose Defines the character values that are accepted as input.
Input Display Text – Defines the text that displays for selection. This is a free-text entry.
Meaning – Hard-coded text associated with the display text.
(M) Move
Required
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
230 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When a value is selected from the screen, the System displays the information defined as the display text for that value.
(M) Move – Allows the order of the display text to be changed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Text (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 231
Chapter 61
Proration Plan Number Data Element
OverviewThe Proration Plan Number data element is used to create an insurance field that defines the patient's proration plan number. A proration plan number is used by financial systems to identify the benefit plans associated with a third party payor.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Proration Plan Number data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Proration Plan Number data element:
None
Variations The Proration Plan Number data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – When the Display Type Constants field of this data element is defined as format, the System displays an expand icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the System to display the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field of this data element. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field. The following fields can display for the Expand variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification Expression
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
232 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Proration Plan Number data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, either prompts for data to be entered or an option to be selected.
No Expand – When the Display Type Constants field is defined as format, the System displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. Though multiple formats can be defined, only one entry is allowed per data element field.
The following fields can display for the No Expand variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthLengthVerification ExpressionRange – This variation indicates the entered number(s) must fall within a certain range. The number range is defined in the Low Range and High Range Constants fields.
The following fields display for the Range variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierLow RangeHigh RangeSelected – This variation indicates the proration plan number is selected from a list of Proration Plan Number Options. Proration Plan Number Options are defined in the Proration Plan Number Table, ^rt("pp").The System displays the Proration Plan Number Options defined in the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip"), Insurance/Payor level, Proration Plan(s) field when the Proration Plan Number Table, ^rt("pp"), Visit Type(s) field is defined with the same visit type as the visit being processed.
When the Proration Plan(s) field is not defined, the System displays all Proration Plan Number Options that have the Proration Plan Number Table, ^rt("pp"), Visit Type(s) field defined with the same visit type as the visit being processed. The Message Modifier Constants field displays for the Selected variation when the Constants field is accessed.
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 61 Proration Plan Number Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 233
ConstantsThe following fields can display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Type
Purpose Defines how data can be entered in the field created from this data element.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to format
System Use (F) Format – Displays the format defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field when the data element is accessed or when the EXPD key is pressed.
Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of free-text characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
234 QuadraMed Corporation
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the valid format for entering information into the data element field.
Input Add/Delete Editor
When adding or editing a format, the following information can be entered:
A – Defines the alphabetic characters used in the format.
9 – Defines the numbers used in the format.
Punctuation marks – Defines a punctuation mark as itself.
For example, when the format is defined as AA-999, a valid entry is CD-123.
System Use Compares the entered data against the defined format and displays an error message when the entered data is in an invalid format.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the entry displays.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the length of the longest format specified.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
Chapter 61 Proration Plan Number Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 235
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check, such as numbers must start with a specific number or set of numbers (Example: 12 or 1812).
Input ULTIMUMPS code/operations (Example: !,|,$s)
For a complete description of ULTIMUMPS expressions, see Chapter 5, Calculations/Expressions in the Introduction to CPR Tables.
Data values (Example: 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered into the System incorrectly and an error message displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Low Range
Purpose Defines the lowest acceptable input value that can be entered into this data element field. This feature is designed to avoid keyed input errors.
Input Integer
Required
System Use Displays an error message when the number entered into the data element field is lower than the defined low range.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
High Range
Purpose Defines the highest acceptable input value that can be entered into this data element field. This feature is designed to avoid keyed input errors.
Input Integer
Required
Length (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
236 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use Displays an error message when the number entered into this data element field is higher than the defined high range.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
High Range (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 237
Chapter 62
Release of Information Data Element
OverviewThe Release of Information data element is used to create a field that defines whether information regarding this patient can be released.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Release of Information data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Release of Information data element:
Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs")
Variations The Release of Information data element consists of the following variations:
Choose – This variation indicates to the System that the options display in the transaction line defined in the Prompt Constants field. The following fields display for the Choose variation when the Constants field is accessed:
PromptFace SheetValuesScreen – This variation indicates to the System that the options display as a selection screen. The following fields display for the Screen variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierFace SheetDisplay Text
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
238 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Release of Information data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, either prompts for a status to be chosen, or displays a list of options and prompts for one to be selected.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Prompt
Purpose Defines the transaction line that displays when this data element is selected during insurance processing.
Input Free-text beginning with the verb Choose.
Each choose value must be included in the prompt. For example, if the following values are defined:
The transaction line (prompt) should be defined as:
Choose No release(N) or release(Y) of information
System Use Displays this transaction line when the data element is selected during insurance processing.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Face Sheet
Purpose Defines the face sheet data element into which information is passed.
Input Partial name match
Single selection
Links from the Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs"), Categories/Data Elements subfile
System Use Stores this value in the face sheet data element, replacing the previously stored results.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
VALUE DISPLAY TEXT MEANING
N N no release of information
Y Y release of information
Chapter 62 Release of Information Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 239
Values
Purpose Defines the character values that are accepted as input.
Input Value – Defines an allowable choice. Only one alphabetic character can be entered, and each value must have a unique letter. The System automatically capitalizes lower case letters.
Display text – Defines the text associated with the defined value. This is a free-text entry.
Meaning – Hard-coded text associated with the value and display text.
Required
System Use When a value is chosen from the transaction line, the System displays the defined display text for that value.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Text
Purpose Defines the character values that are accepted as input.
Input Display text – Defines the text that displays for selection. This is a free-text entry.
Meaning – Hard-coded text associated with the display text.
(M) Move
Required
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
240 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When a value is selected from the screen, the System displays the information defined as the display text for that value.
(M) Move – Allows the order of the options to be changed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Text (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 241
Chapter 63
Require Verification Data Element
OverviewThe Require Verification data element is used to create a field that defines whether the insurance requires verification prior to treatment.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Require Verification data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Require Verification data element:
Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs")
Variations The Require Verification data element consists of the following variations:
Choose – This variation indicates to the System that the options display in the transaction line defined in the Prompt Constants field. The following fields display for the Choose variation when the Constants field is accessed:
PromptFace SheetValuesScreen – This variation indicates to the System that the options display as a selection screen. The following fields display for the Screen variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierFace SheetDisplay Text
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
242 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Require Verification data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, either prompts for a status to be chosen, or displays a list of options and prompts for one to be selected. The information that defaults into this data element field is a result of the require verification calculation.
ConstantsThe following fields can display when the Constants field is accessed:
Prompt
Purpose Defines the transaction line that displays when this data element is selected during insurance processing.
Input Free-text beginning with the verb Choose.
Each choose value must be included in the prompt. For example, if the following values are defined:
The transaction line (prompt) should be defined as:
Choose not required(N) or required(Y)
System Use Displays this transaction line when the data element is selected during insurance processing.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Face Sheet
Purpose Defines the face sheet data element into which information is passed.
Input Partial name match
Single selection
Links from the Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs"), Categories/Data Elements subfile
System Use Stores this value in the face sheet data element, replacing the previously stored results.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
VALUE DISPLAY TEXT MEANING
N Not required do not require verification
Y Required require verification
Chapter 63 Require Verification Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 243
Values
Purpose Defines the character values that are accepted as input.
Input Value – Defines an allowable choice. Only one alphabetic character can be entered, and each value must have a unique letter. The System automatically capitalizes lower case letters.
Display text – Defines the text associated with the defined value. This is a free-text entry.
Meaning – Hard-coded text associated with the value and display text.
Required
System Use When a value is chosen from the transaction line, the System displays the defined display text for that value.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Text
Purpose Defines the character values that are accepted as input.
Input Display text – Defines the text that displays for selection. This is a free-text entry.
Meaning – Hard-coded text associated with the display text.
(M) Move
Required
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
244 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use When a value is selected from the screen, the System displays the information defined as the display text for that value.
(M) Move – Allows the order of the options to be changed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Text (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 245
Chapter 64
Review Agency Contact Person Data Element
OverviewThe Review Agency Contact Person data element is used to create an insurance field that allows the contact person of the review agency to be defined.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Review Agency Contact Person data element is accessed, the System prompts for a contact person to be identified. The System defaults the review agency contact person defined in the Insurance Review Agency Table, ^rt("ira"), Contact field. This option can be accepted or a free-text contact person can be defined.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Review Agency Contact Person data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Review Agency Contact Person data element:
Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs")
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
When a free-text contact person is defined, the System treats the field created from this data element as a free-text field. Therefore, if a new review agency is selected from the Insurance Review Agency Table, ^rt("ira"), for the Review Agency data element field, the System does not default the new contact person into this data element field unless this data element field is cleared prior to the selection of the new agency.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
246 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Face Sheet
Purpose Defines the face sheet data element into which information is passed.
Input Partial name match
Single selection
Links from the Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs"), Categories/Data Elements subfile
System Use Stores this value in the face sheet data element, replacing the previously stored results.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 247
Chapter 65
Review Agency Data Element
OverviewThe Review Agency data element is used to create an insurance field that allows a review agency to be defined. A review agency is an outside (that is, non-hospital) agency that is responsible for reviewing healthcare services that are provided to patients who are covered by Medicare or other third parties.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Review Agency data element is accessed, the System displays a list of Review Agency Options and prompts for one to be selected. The System defaults the review agency defined in the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip"), Review Agency field. This option can be accepted or another option can be selected. Review Agency Options are defined in the Insurance Review Agency Table, ^rt("ira").
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Review Agency data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Review Agency data element:
Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs")
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
248 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Face Sheet
Purpose Defines the face sheet data element into which information is passed.
Input Partial name match
Single selection
Links from the Face Sheet Table, ^nt("fs"), Categories/Data Elements subfile
System Use Stores this value in the face sheet data element, replacing the previously stored results.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 249
Chapter 66
Secondary Numbers Data Element
OverviewThe Secondary Numbers data element is used to create a field that allows a secondary number to be entered during insurance processing. Secondary numbers associated with an insurance (Example: A Medicaid number) can be used in patient identification to identify a visit for processing.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM the Secondary Numbers data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO the Secondary Numbers data element:
Visit Secondary Number Table, ^rt("vsn")
Required Status The required status for this data element is database-defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ̂ rt("ipp"), Data Element Definition Screen, Required? field, as well as in the Required Expr Expressions field.
NOTE: When both the Required? field and a required expression are defined, the System uses the most restrictive required status.
Variations The Secondary Numbers data element consists of the following variations:
Multiple Types - Display Only – This variation is a display only variation (that is, it displays a previously created secondary number); it does not allow the assignment of a secondary number. When a secondary number does not exist (that is, has not been defined elsewhere in the System), the number does not display. The number must be assigned elsewhere in the System by a non-display only variation. This variation should be used when the secondary number type variation that assigns the secondary number is a multiple types variation. The following fields display for the Multiple Types - Display Only variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierSecondary Number Type(s)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
250 QuadraMed Corporation
Multiple Types - Expand – This variation causes the System to prompt for the secondary number to be entered. Since this is an expand variation, an expand icon displays at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key displays all possible formats. Format Options are defined in the Visit Secondary Number Table, ^rt("vsn"), Display Format(s) field. The following fields display for the Multiple Types - Expand variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierSecondary Number Type(s)Allow Duplicate Secondary Number(s)?Allow Edit of Secondary Number(s)?Manual Number EntryMultiple Types - No Expand – This variation is the same as the Multiple Types - Expand variation, except the Format Options automatically display when the System prompts for the number(s) to be entered. The following fields display for the Multiple Types - No Expand variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierSecondary Number Type(s)Allow Duplicate Secondary Number(s)?Allow Edit of Secondary Number(s)?Manual Number EntrySingle Type - Display Only – This variation is a display only variation. It is similar to the Multiple Types - Display Only variation, except that it displays only one number. This variation should be used when the secondary number type variation that assigns the secondary number is a single type variation. The following fields display for the Single Type - Display Only variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierSecondary Number TypeSingle Type - Expand – This variation causes the System to prompt for the secondary number to be entered. Since this is an expand variation, an expand icon displays at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key displays all the possible formats. Format Options are defined in the Visit Secondary Number Table, ^rt("vsn"), Display Format(s) field. The following fields display for the Single Type - Expand variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierSecondary Number TypeAllow Duplicate Secondary Number(s)?Allow Edit of Secondary Number(s)?Manual Number EntrySingle Type - No Expand – This variation is the same as the Single Type - Expand variation, except that after the data element is selected, the System prompts for a number to be entered. The Format Options automatically display.
Chapter 66 Secondary Numbers Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 251
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Secondary Numbers data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, either automatically displays the secondary number in the data element field or prompts for a number to be entered/selected. When the Multiple Types - No Expand or Single Type - No Expand variation is defined, the System automatically displays all the defined formats. When the Multiple Types - Expand or Single Type - Expand variation is defined, the EXPD key can be pressed to display the formats.
The Secondary Numbers data element can be defined to either display only (that is, not allow editing) or allow the assignment of the secondary number. A facility can define a single secondary number or multiple secondary numbers.
ConstantsThe following fields can display when the Constants field is accessed:
The following fields display for the Single Type - No Expand variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierSecondary Number TypeAllow Duplicate Secondary Number(s)?Allow Edit of Secondary Number(s)?Manual Number Entry
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
252 QuadraMed Corporation
Secondary Number Type/Secondary Number Type(s)
Purpose Defines the secondary number types that is used for the secondary number.
Input For the Secondary Number Type field:
Single selection
Links from the Visit Secondary Number Table, ^rt("vsn")
For the Secondary Number Type(s) field:
Add/Delete Editor
Single selection
Links from the Visit Secondary Number Table, ^rt("vsn")NOTE: The Secondary Number Options that display for selection have the Visit Secondary Number Table, ^rt("vsn"), Auto Assign? field defined as noNOTE: The visit screen that is built with the Insurance/Payor data element used to access the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Secondary Numbers data element must have the Secondary Numbers data element, Secondary Number Type(s) Constants field defined with a different secondary number type.
Required
System Use Determines which secondary number type is used for the secondary number.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Allow Duplicate Secondary Number(s)?
Purpose Defines whether duplicate secondary numbers are allowed.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
System Use Yes – Indicates duplicate secondary numbers are allowed. When duplicate numbers are allowed, and a duplicate number is entered, the System displays the visit with the matching secondary number and prompts to verify the use of the duplicate secondary number.
No – Indicates duplicate secondary numbers are not allowed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 66 Secondary Numbers Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 253
ExpressionsThe following fields display when the Expressions field is accessed:
Allow Edit of Secondary Number(s)?
Purpose Defines whether the secondary number can be edited after the number has been assigned.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
System Use Yes – Indicates the user can select and manually edit the secondary number during a visit edit.
No – Indicates the secondary number cannot be manually edited after assignment.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Manual Number Entry
Purpose Defines whether manual number entry is allowed.
Input Single selection from the following hard-coded options:
At downtime only
Never allow manual entry
Always allow manual entry
Defaults to at downtime only
System Use At downtime only – Indicates manual number entry is allowed only when the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Allow Recent Downtime Processing? field is defined as yes.
Never allow manual entry – Indicates manual number entry is not allowed.
Always allow manual entry – Indicates manual number entry is always allowed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Edit Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field can be edited by the user. This Expr field displays only when the Expand or No Expand variation is used.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
254 QuadraMed Corporation
Display Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field can be accessed on the screen driver on the user's side. When display security fails, the selection number and data for the field are starred out.
Required Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field is required. This Expr field displays only when the Expand or No Expand variation is used.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
QuadraMed Corporation 255
Chapter 67
Send Verification Data Element
OverviewThe Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt(“ipp”), Send Verification data element is used in the following instances:
During the insurance verification process to support communication to a variety of third-party eligibility verification systems, including the ability to swipe a health card for real time insurance verification.
During visit processing, send verification data can be copied forward from the mother’s visit record to the newborn’s visit record.
During the visit insurance verification process to streamline the insurance validation process by retaining or clearing data based upon the individual visit process.
The Send Verification data element provides the ability to verify coverage real-time (electronically) by allowing the user to swipe a health card for insurance verification or perform manual verification by entering data. Insurance verification functionality is extended from inter-job communication (IJC) transactions performed during insurance verification processing to full validation/verification via an interface.
The use of the Send Verification data element provides a cost-effective and time-saving solution to insurance verification for the healthcare facility and patients. Customers can identify and clarify insurance issues before the patient services are rendered. Real time verification allows medical services to be rendered in a timely manner. This enhancement saves the time and expense of tracking patient services and reimbursement.
This requires customized interface work. Please contact Client Support for assistance.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
256 QuadraMed Corporation
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce the field created from the Send Verification data element is accessed, insurance verification processing is based on the definition of the Verification Start Method Constants field. The Send Verification data element provides the ability to verify coverage real-time (electronically) by allowing the user to swipe a health card for insurance verification or perform manual verification by entering data.
Manual VerificationThe System performs manual insurance verification when the Send Verification data element is accessed during insurance processing and the Verification Start Method Constants field is defined as manual. The System displays a Start Verification? message on the transaction line in the field created from this data element and prompts the user to answer yes or no. Clicking (Y) Yes initiates the interface defined in the Interface Constants field of this data element and starts the insurance verification process. Clicking (N) No stops the insurance verification process and returns the user to the insurance/payor profile screen for the defined insurance.
Card Reader VerificationThe System performs card reader insurance verification when the Send Verification data element is accessed during insurance processing, and the Verification Start Method Constants field is defined as card reader. The System prompts to scan the card or to choose to enter the information manually by clicking (M) Manual Override as shown below.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM the Send Verification data element:
Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt(“ip”)
Links FROM other Tables TO the Send Verification data element:
Facility Table, ^affGeneric Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt(“gi”)Interface Table, ^atiManagement Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”)
Required Status The required status for this data element is database-defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ̂ rt(“ipp”), Data Element Definition Screen, Required? field, as well as in the Required Expr Expressions field.
NOTE: When both the Required? field and a required expression are defined, the System uses the most restrictive required status.
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 67 Send Verification Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 257
Clicking Back stops the insurance verification process and returns the user to the insurance/payor screen. The manner in which the card reader performs is defined in the Card Reader Parameters Constants field.
Scan Insurance CardSwiping the insurance card in the card reader initiates the interface defined in the Interface Constants field of this data element.
Manual OverrideClicking (M) Manual Override as shown above from the Send Verification data element field prompts the user to enter data specified in the Card Reader Parameters Constants field, Card Capture Parameters subfield (Manual Start Parameters). The text defined for the transaction line prompt is defined in the Card Reader Parameters Constants field, Card Capture Parameters subfield, Message Modifier sub-subfield.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
258 QuadraMed Corporation
For example, the user can be prompted to enter the Health Card Number as shown below.
When each required field is completed and OK clicked or ENTER pressed, the entered data loads into the insurance record and the interface defined in the Interface Constants field is initiated.
Verification InterfaceOnce the interface is initiated, an interface processing message appears: Verification in progress.... The interface attempts to establish communication with the insurance vendor verification option defined for the current insurance/payor/facility in the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt(“ip”), Facility Definitions Subfile, Insurance Verification Vendor field.
When communication is not established, the error message defined for the facility/insurance verification vendor in the Insurance Verification Vendor Table, ^rt(“ipv”), Transmission Error Message field displays.
When communication is established, interface messaging with the insurance verification vendor occurs until there is an error or the communication is completed. The interface obtains and sends the QuadraMed CPR data required by the insurance verification vendor and also receives the insurance verification status and/or other data from the insurance verification vendor.
When the interface communication is completed within the time frame specified in the Insurance Verification Vendor Table, ^rt(“ipv”), Facility Definitions Subfile, Seconds Delay Allowed field, the Verification Status Screen displays with the data to be filed and the user must click OK or press ENTER from that screen to update the information as shown below.
Chapter 67 Send Verification Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 259
Clicking OK or pressing ENTER files the data on the Verification Status Screen and populates the appropriate fields on the insurance profile screen as shown below. When the add/edit visit transaction is accepted, this information is filed to the visit record.
Clicking the Back button from the Verification Status Screen backs the user out of the Send Verification data element, discards the verification and associated data, and returns the user to the insurance payor/profile screen.
When the interface communication is not completed within the time frame specified in the Insurance Verification Vendor Table, ^rt(“ipv”), Facility Definitions Subfile, Seconds Delay Allowed field, the System displays the text defined in the Timeout Message field.
The user must click OK and the user can continue editing the visit/insurance screen. The data entered to initiate verification is loaded to the visit/insurance fields until the visit is accepted. When the visit is accepted, the data is filed and the visit is routed for follow-up to the management queue defined in the Timeout Management Queue(s) Constants field.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
260 QuadraMed Corporation
Visit Insurance ProcessingThe Send Verification data element can be utilized during visit processing as follows:
The Newborn Admission menu function can be defined to determine whether Send Verification data is copied forward from the mother’s visit record to the newborn’s visit record.
When adding, editing, or converting a visit, the insurance validation process can be streamlined by retaining or clearing data based upon the individual visit process, ensuring the appropriate insurance verification is performed.
Streamlined Newborn AdmissionThe insurance data automatically copied from the mother’s visit record to the newborn’s visit record can be specified to include send verification data. The ability to configure the type of insurance data eliminates incorrect or unnecessary data existing in the newborn’s visit record. This ensures appropriate data exists in the newborn’s record and expedites reimbursement to the facility for services provided.
After a newborn is registered, the entry of data for a newborn admission has been streamlined. The System can default send verification insurance information for the visit based on the Newborn Admission menu function, Copy Mother Insurance Data push parameter.
The Copy Mother Insurance Data push parameter defines the data from the mother’s visit record that is copied into the equivalent visit data element in the newborn’s visit when the visit is created in the Newborn Admission menu function.
Chapter 67 Send Verification Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 261
When the Newborn Admission menu function, Copy Mother Insurance Data push parameter, Mark for Copy? prompt for the Send Verification option is defined as yes, the System copies the visit data from the mother’s record into the newborn’s visit. The data copies forward only if it exists in the mother’s record.
When the Newborn Admission menu function, Copy Mother Insurance Data push parameter, Mark for Copy? prompt for the Send Verification option is defined as no, the System does not copy the visit data from the mother’s record into the newborn’s visit. Current algorithms are used to determine whether data defaults.
When the Mark for Copy? prompt for the Send Verification option is defined as no, the System clears the data within the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt(“ipp”), Send Verification data element and processes as follows:
Empty field processing is invoked when the insurance is copied forward.
Processing within the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt(“ipp”), Send Verification data element field follows the current workflow for validating insurance through the third-party verification interface.
Once the interface validation message is accepted, any new data is updated within Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt(“ipp”), insurance data element fields and the date/time of validation are included as a suffix to the validation status message displayed in the field created from the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt(“ipp”), Send Verification data element.
When the mother’s data is not copied into the newborn’s visit, the field created from the Send Verification data element displays Not Sent. The System forces the user through the verification process. Once the interface validation message is accepted, applicable data is updated on the insurance profile screen and the date/time of validation displays as a suffix to the validation message in the field created from the Insurance Payor/Profile Table, ^rt(“ipp”), Send Verification data element.
When the mother’s data is copied forward, the mother’s data populates the Insurance Payor/Profile Table, ̂ rt(“ipp”), Send Verification data element. The System suffixes the verification data with the date and time of the last verification. If the verification occurred on a day other than the current date, the System also prefixes the verification data with Previous.
The send verification data copies forward only when the Mark for Copy? prompt is defined as yes for both the Send Verification and Insurance/Payor options in the Newborn Admission menu function, Copy Mother Insurance Data push parameter. If the Insurance/Payor option does not copy forward, the send verification data does not copy forward regardless of the definition of the Mark for Copy? prompt for this option.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
262 QuadraMed Corporation
Visit AddWhen adding a new visit, any previous send verification data within the data element is cleared in the field created from the Insurance Payor/Profile Table, ^rt(“ipp”), Send Verification data element during insurance processing. The System displays Not Sent in the data element field. The System forces the user through the verification process. Once the interface validation message is accepted, applicable data is updated on the insurance profile screen and the date/time of validation displays as a suffix to the validation message in the field created from the Send Verification data element.
Visit ConversionWhen a visit is converted using the Visit Type Conversion menu function, previous data within the Insurance Payor/Profile Table, ^rt(“ipp”), Send Verification data element is retained. The System suffixes the verification data with the date and time of the last verification. If the verification occurred on a day other than the current date, the System also prefixes the verification data with Previous.
When verification has not been performed before the conversion, the field created from the data element displays Not Sent. The System forces the user through the verification process. Once the interface validation message is accepted, data is updated on the insurance profile screen and the date/time of validation displays as a suffix to the validation message in the field created from the Send Verification data element.
Visit EditWhen editing a visit, previous data within the Insurance Payor/Profile Table, ^rt(“ipp”), Send Verification data element is retained. The System suffixes the verification data with the date and time of the last verification. If the verification occurred on a day other than the current date, the System also prefixes the verification data with Previous.
When verification has not been performed at visit creation, the field created from the data element displays Not Sent. The user must select the field to perform the verification process. Once the interface validation message is accepted, applicable data is updated on the insurance profile screen and the date/time of validation displays as a suffix to the validation message in the field created from the Send Verification data element.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Timeout Management Queue(s)
Purpose Defines the management queue to which the patient visit is routed when the interface communication is not completed within the time frame specified in the Insurance Verification Vendor Table, ^rt(“ipv”), Facility Definitions Subfile, Seconds Delay Allowed field.
Chapter 67 Send Verification Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 263
Input Add/Delete Editor
Facility-specific
Single selection of management group option
Links from the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Management Queue Group level Single selection of management queue
Links from the Management Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”), Subfile Options level, Management Queue(s) subfile
System Use Routes the patient visit to the management queue defined in this field when communication with the insurance verification vendor system is not completed within the time frame defined in the Insurance Verification Vendor Table, ^rt(“ipv”), Seconds Delay Allowed field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Interface
Purpose Defines the interface option that communicates to an insurance/payor validation system when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Input Single selection
Links from the Interface Table, ^ati
Required
System Use Determines whether current services for the patient are covered by the insurance/payor during registration/visit processing by performing full validation/insurance verification via this interface.l
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Start Method
Purpose Defines the method used to start communication by the interface.
Input (M) Manual – This is the default.
(C) Card Reader – Causes the Card Reader Parameters field to display for definition.
System Use (M) Manual – Indicates interface communication is started when the user answers yes to the Start Verification? message on the transaction line in the field created from this data element. This is the default.
Timeout Management Queue(s) (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
264 QuadraMed Corporation
(C) Card Reader – Indicates interface communication can be started either by a card swipe in a card reader.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Card Reader Parameters
Purpose Defines how the data read from the health card is extracted and used with the insurance verification interface and within the QuadraMed CPR application. Displays only when the Verification Start Method field is defined as card reader.
Input Displays the following subfields for definition:
Field DelimiterCard Capture Parameters
System Use Uses the information defined in the Field Delimiter and Card Capture Parameters subfields to determine how data read from the health card is extracted and used with the insurance verification interface.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Field Delimiter
Purpose Defines the character that determines where the previous field ends and the next field begins. This field can be defined with one or more free-text characters.
Input Defaults to ^
System Use The System searches for characters defined in this field to parse the string obtained from the card scan into a series of ordered fields.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Card Capture Parameters
Purpose Defines the data to be extracted from the card and sent to the interface.
Input Insert/Delete Editor
Displays the following subfields for definition:
Card Reader Parameters Section
Verification Start Method (Continued)
Chapter 67 Send Verification Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 265
Card Reader Parameters Section
Ins/Payor DE PointerCard LocationOverride Previous Data?
Manual Start Information Section
Message Modifier
Format(s)
Display Name
Required Status
System Use Card Reader Parameters Section – Defines the location of the data to be extracted from the card and its mapping to the insurance record.
Manual Start Information Section – Defines parameters for data that must be manually entered when clicking (M) Manual Override.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Ins/Payor DE Pointer
Purpose Defines the type of generic insurance/payor data element to which the data is mapped.
Input Single selection from a hard-coded list of generic insurance/payor data elements (currently only Generic Formatted Entry is available).
Single selection from an option from the Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt(“gi”)
System Use Maps the data read from the health card to the applicable field of the insurance record.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Card Location
Purpose Defines the location of the desired data, within the string returned from the health card reader.
Input Enter card field position – Numeric with no range limit.
Enter begin character position – Numeric with no range limit.
Enter end character position – Numeric integer with no range limit, however; the value entered must be greater than the value entered for the beginning character position.
Card Capture Parameters (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
266 QuadraMed Corporation
Manual Start Information Section
System Use The position of the field in the string returned from the health card. The System extracts characters from this field that lie within the defined Begin and End character positions and passes the data for use by the interface and mapping to the defined generic insurance/payor data element.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Override Previous Data?
Purpose Defines whether any data already input into the mapped insurance/payor field is overridden by entry of new data.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
System Use Yes – Overrides any data previously entered into the mapped insurance/payor field.
No – Displays a warning message when the manually entered or scanned data is different than existing data and prompts whether to override existing data.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line prompt after clicking (M) Manual Override in the field created from this data element. The (M) Manual Override button displays when the Verification Start Method Constants field is defined as card reader.
Input Free-text
Required
System Use Displays this text as the prompt for entry of data after clicking (M) Manual Override.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Card Location (Continued)
Chapter 67 Send Verification Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 267
Format(s)
Purpose Defines the format in which the data must be entered manually after clicking the (M) Manual Override button.
Input Add/Delete Editor
Enter format (A=letter; 9=number)
Required
System Use Compares the entered data to this defined format and displays an error message when the data does not match this format.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Name
Purpose Defines the name of the screen driver field on the Manual Override Screen.
Input Free-text
Required
System Use Displays the text defined in this subfield as the name of the screen driver field on the Manual Override Screen.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Required Status
Purpose Defines whether the field on the Manual Override Screen is required.
Input (N) Not Required
(R) Required
Defaults to not required
System Use (N) Not Required – Indicates the field on the manual override screen driver is not required. The verification can be initiated if the field is blank.
(R) Required – Indicates the field on the manual override screen driver is required. Data must be defined in the field in order to initiate the verification process.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
268 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 269
Chapter 68
Signature Date Data Element
OverviewThe Signature Date data element is used to create an insurance field that collects the date on which the hospital obtained the patient's signature, authorizing the hospital to bill the third party for services rendered.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Signature Date data element is accessed, the System prompts for a date to be entered.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM the Send Verification data element:
Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt(“ip”)
Links FROM other Tables TO the Send Verification data element:
Facility Table, ^aff Generic Insurance/Payor Data Element Table, ^rt(“gi”)Interface Table, ^atiManagement Queue Table, ^rt(“qv”)
Required Status The required status for this data element is database-defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ̂ rt(“ipp”), Data Element Definition Screen, Required? field, as well as in the Required Expr Expressions field.
NOTE: When both the Required? field and a required expression are defined, the System uses the most restrictive required status.
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
270 QuadraMed Corporation
The System accepts the following date formats:
t (today) – Current System date.
t+/–offset – Current System date plus or minus a valid offset. The System accepts the following offsets:
x (number) – Indicates the offset is a number of days, indicated by x. For example, t+1 is tomorrow.
xw – Indicates the offset is a number of weeks, indicated by x. For example, t+3w is three weeks or 21 days in the future.
xm – Indicates the offset is a number of months, indicated by x. The date is the same day x months later. For example, when the current System date is 19 July 07, t+3m is October 2007.
xy – Indicates the offset is a number of years, indicated by x.
The date is the same day x years later. For example, when the current System date is 19 July 07, t+2y is 2009.
Acceptable date formats are determined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters level, Date Parsing field. Depending on the date parsing option selected, the System accepts the date in the following formats:
U.S.A.
The month, day and year can be defined in the following formats:
mm-dd-yy
mm/dd/yy
dd mmm yy
dd mmm yyyy
The month and year can be defined in the following formats:
mm/yy
mm-yy
mmm yyyy
The year can be defined as yyyy.
When approximate dates are allowed, any of the above formats can be prefixed by a tilde (~) to indicate an approximate date. For example, ~ June 2007.
When a month is defined as a three character format (that is, mmm), the input is an alpha character. When the month is defined as a two character format (that is, mm), the input is numeric.
Chapter 68 Signature Date Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 271
Canada – Canadian parsing interprets the first number of an unformatted date string as a day rather than a month.
International – Currently not used.
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
272 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 273
Chapter 69
Subscriber Address Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Address data element is used to create a field that allows the residential address of the subscriber to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Address data element is accessed, the System displays an Address Collection Screen. The Address Collection Screen that displays is defined in the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), and linked to the Address Collection Screen Constants field of this data element.
When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Address data element field into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Release of Information data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Release of Information data element:
Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad")
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
274 QuadraMed Corporation
When the same as guarantor? processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Address data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
When the other subscriber? processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Address data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Address Collection Screen
Purpose Defines the Address Collection Screen that displays to collect the address on the user's side.
Input Single selection
Links from the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad")
System Use Displays this Address Collection Screen when the field created from this data element is selected during insurance processing.
When a screen is not defined in this field, the System displays the screen defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Address Collection Driver field.
For a complete description of address screens, see Chapter 1, Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad") in the Address Collection Driver Table Reference.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 69 Subscriber Address Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 275
Street Address Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into the field created from the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), Street Address data element, when the field created from this data element is accessed during insurance processing.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), Street Address data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When this field is not defined, there is no limit for entering characters into the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), Street Address data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
City Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into the field created from the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), City data element, when the field created from this data element is accessed during insurance processing.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), City data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When this field is not defined, there is no limit for entering characters into the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), City data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
County Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into the field created from the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), County data element, when the field created from this data element is accessed during insurance processing.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), County data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
276 QuadraMed Corporation
When this field is not defined, there is no limit for entering characters into the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), County data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
State Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into the field created from the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), State data element, when the field created from this data element is accessed during insurance processing.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), State data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When this field is not defined, there is no limit for entering characters into the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), State data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Country Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into the field created from the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), Country data element, when the field created from this data element is accessed during insurance processing.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), Country data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When this field is not defined, there is no limit for entering characters into the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), Country data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
County Length (Continued)
Chapter 69 Subscriber Address Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 277
Mailing Code Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into the field created from the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), Mailing Code data element, when the field created from this data element is accessed during insurance processing.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol ( | ) at the end of the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), Mailing Code data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When this field is not defined, there is no limit for entering characters into the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), Mailing Code data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
278 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 279
Chapter 70
Subscriber Birthdate Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Birthdate data element is used to create a field that allows the subscriber's birthdate to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Birthdate data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Birthdate data element:
None
Variations The Subscriber Birthdate data element consists of the following variations:Date – This variation displays the subscriber's birthdate and, in parentheses, the subscriber's age. The System calculates the age based on the birthdate. The following field displays for the Date variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierDate-No Age – This variation displays only the subscriber's birthdate. The following field displays for the Date-No Age variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierDate/Time – This variation displays the subscriber's birthdate, time, and in parentheses, the subscriber's age. The System calculates the age based on the birthdate. The following field displays for the Date/Time variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierDate/Time-No Age – This variation displays the subscriber's birthdate and time. The following field displays for the Date/Time-No Age variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
280 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Birthdate data element is accessed, the QuadraMed CPR System, depending on the variation selected, prompts for either a date or a date and time to be entered. The System allows the date to be entered in the following ways:
t (today) – Current System date.
t+/–offset – Current System date plus or minus a valid offset. The System accepts the following offsets:
x (number) – Indicates the offset is a number of days, indicated by x. For example, t+1 is tomorrow.
xw – Indicates the offset is a number of weeks, indicated by x. For example, t+3w is three weeks or 21 days in the future.
xm – Indicates the offset is a number of months, indicated by x. The date is the same day x months later. For example, when the current System date is 19 July 07, t+3m is October 2007.
xy – Indicates the offset is a number of years, indicated by x. The date is the same day x years later. For example, when the current System date is 19 July 07, t+2y is 2009.
Acceptable date formats are determined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, General Parameters level, Date Parsing field. Depending on the date parsing option selected, the System accepts the date in the following formats:
U.S.A.
The month, day and year can be defined in the following formats:
mm-dd-yy
mm/dd/yy
dd mmm yy
dd mmm yyyy
The month and year can be defined in the following formats:
mm/yy
mm-yy
mmm yyyy
The year can be defined as yyyy.
When approximate dates are allowed, any of the above formats can be prefixed by a tilde (~) to indicate an approximate date. For example, ~ June 2007.
When a month is defined as a three character format (that is, mmm), the input is an alpha character. When the month is defined as a two character format (that is, mm), the input is numeric.
Chapter 70 Subscriber Birthdate Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 281
Canada – Canadian parsing interprets the first number of an unformatted date string as a day rather than a month.
International – Currently not used.
QuadraMed CPR allows a date and time to be entered in the following ways:
n (now) – Current System date and time.
t (today) – Current System date. A t can be entered by itself or followed by a time (Example: t 0700 is today at 0700).
Date and timeAll of the previously identified date formats are acceptable with the following time formats:
n (now) with or without a suffix – When now is entered as n, the System defaults the current time. The System accepts the following now suffixes:
n+/–x – Indicates that the offset time is defined in minutes. For example, n+30 is half-hour from now.
n+/–xh – Indicates that the offset time is defined in hours. For example, n+2h is two hours from now.
The System evaluates each entered time for the proper format. When an unrecognized format is entered, the System displays an error message.
When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Birthdate data element into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible.
When the same as guarantor processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Birthdate data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
When the other subscriber processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Birthdate data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
282 QuadraMed Corporation
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line prompt after clicking (M) Manual Override in the field created from this data element. The (M) Manual Override button displays when the Verification Start Method Constants field is defined as card reader.
Input Free-text
Required
System Use Displays this text as the prompt for entry of data after clicking (M) Manual Override.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 283
Chapter 71
Subscriber Day Telephone Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Day Telephone data element is used to create a field that allows the subscriber's daytime telephone number (that is, work telephone number) to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Day Telephone data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Day Telephone data element:
None
Variations The Subscriber Day Telephone data element consists of the following variations:
None Option – This variation operates the same as the Standard variation with the addition of or Choose none(N) as a processing option in the transaction line. The following field displays for the None Option variation when the Constants field is accessed:Message ModifierStandard – This variation allows standard telephone formats to be entered. For a complete description of standard telephone formats, see Chapter 4, Standard Data Elements in the Introduction to CPR Tables. The following field displays for the Standard variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
284 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Day Telephone data element is accessed, the System prompts for a telephone number to be entered or for the same as subscriber home phone number(S) processing option to be chosen. When the None Option variation is used, the System also prompts, as part of the transaction line, or Choose none(N). QuadraMed CPR accepts standard telephone formats.
When the same as subscriber home phone number(S) processing option is chosen, the System defaults in the telephone number defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Home Telephone data element.
When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Day Telephone data element into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible.
When the same as guarantor processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Day Telephone data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
When the other subscriber processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Day Telephone data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 285
Chapter 72
Subscriber Driver's License Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Driver's License data element is used to create a field that allows the subscriber's driver's license number to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Driver's License data element is accessed, the System prompts for a state to be entered. The EXPD key can be pressed for a list of all the State Options.
When the state is entered without pressing the EXPD key, the System prompts for a license number to be entered and displays the XP icon. A license number can be entered or the EXPD key can be pressed again for a list of the defined formats.
When the EXPD key is pressed for a list of State Options, after a state is selected, the System automatically displays the defined format and prompts for a license number to be entered. When a number is entered that does not match the defined format, an error message displays.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Driver's License data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Driver's License data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
286 QuadraMed Corporation
When no format is defined, QuadraMed CPR accepts an entry in any format. After the license number is entered, the System displays the state's initials followed by the license number. State Options are defined in the Country/State/County Table, ^rt("cs"), State level. License number formats are defined in the Country/State/County Table, ^rt("cs"), State level, Driver's License Pattern(s) field.
When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Driver's License data element into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible.
When the same as guarantor processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Driver's License data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
When the other subscriber processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Driver's License data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 287
Chapter 73
Subscriber Employee ID Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Employee ID data element is used to create a field that allows the employee identification number of the subscriber to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Employee ID data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Employee ID data element:
None
Variations The Subscriber Employee ID data element consists of the following variations:
Expand – This variation displays an expand icon at the bottom of the screen. When the EXPD key is pressed, the System displays all the formats defined in the Display Format(s) Constants field. The following fields can display for the Expand variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeLengthDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthVerification ExpressionNo Expand – This variation automatically displays the defined formats when the field created from this data element is accessed.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
288 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Employee ID data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, either displays a list of format options and/or prompts for an identification number to be entered. When the format options do not automatically display, the System displays the XP icon at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the EXPD key causes the format options to display.
When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Employee ID data element into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible. When the same as guarantor processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Employee ID data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited. When the other subscriber processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Employee ID data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following fields can display when the Constants field is accessed:
The following fields can display for the No Expand variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierDisplay TypeLengthDisplay Format(s)Display Maximum LengthVerification Expression
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
Chapter 73 Subscriber Employee ID Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 289
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Type
Purpose Defines the type of check that will be performed on the data entered into this data element field.
Input (F) Format
(L) Length
Defaults to format
System Use (F) Format – Indicates how the characters must be arranged to be accepted as input. Displays the following additional fields for definition:
Display Format(s)Display Maximum Length
(L) Length – Displays a bar (|) at the end of the transaction line, indicating the maximum number of characters that can be entered. Displays the Length field for definition.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Display Format(s)
Purpose Defines the specific format allowed for this data element.
Input Add/Delete Editor
Formatted entry
Accepts A’s or 9’s only
A – Defines an alphabetic character
9 – Defines a numerical digit
For example, an acceptable entry for an AA999 format would be CD234.
System Use Checks each number entered against the defined format. When the number does not match, displays a warning message.
When no format is defined, the System does not perform any checks on the entered data.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
290 QuadraMed Corporation
Display Maximum Length
Purpose Defines whether the maximum length of the formatted entry should be displayed when the field created from this data element is selected during insurance processing.
Input Yes/No
Defaults to no
System Use Yes – Displays the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
No – Does not display the end of line symbol.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Verification Expression
Purpose Defines a more specific format check (Example: The number must start with a specific set of numbers, such as 12 or 1812).
Input Mumps code/operations (Example: !, |, $s, and so on)
Data values (Example: 1812, A1812)
System Use Evaluates/performs the defined expression. When the expression returns a false value, the number was entered incorrectly and an error messages displays.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 291
Chapter 74
Subscriber Employer Address Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Employer Address data element is used to create a field that allows the subscriber's employer address to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Employer Address data element is accessed, the System either automatically defaults the subscriber's employer address or displays an Address Collection Screen.
The Address Collection Screen that displays is defined in the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad"), and linked to the Address Collection Screen Constants field of this data element.When no entry is made into the field created from the Subscriber Employer data element, the System stars out ( ** ) this field, making it inaccessible.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Employer Address data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Employer Address data element:
Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad")
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
292 QuadraMed Corporation
When the Subscriber Employer data element is defined, this data element field can be defined as follows:
Automatically defaulted by the System when the information for the Subscriber Employer data element is selected from the Employer Table, ^rt("em"). When the address is defined in the Employer Table, ^rt("em"), Employer level, Address field, the System defaults the employer address into this field. After the System defaults this information, it stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible.
Automatically defaulted by the System when the information for the Subscriber Branch data element is selected from the Employer Table, ^rt("em"). When the address is defined in the Employer Table, ^rt("em"), Branch level, Address field, the System defaults the branch address into this field. The branch address overrides the employer address. After the System defaults this information, it stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible.
Free-text entry of the address.
When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Employer Address data element into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible. When the same as guarantor? processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Employer Address data element field into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
When the other subscriber? processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Employer Address data element field for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
Chapter 74 Subscriber Employer Address Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 293
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Address Collection Screen
Purpose Defines the Address Collection Screen that displays to collect the address on the user's side.
Input Single selection
Links from the Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad")
System Use Displays this Address Collection Screen when the field created from this data element is selected during insurance processing.
When a screen is not defined in this field, the System displays the screen defined in the System Parameter Table, ^%z, Reg/ADT System Parameters subfile, Facility-specific level, Miscellaneous Data Screen, Address Collection Driver field.
For a complete description of address screens, see Chapter 1, Address Collection Driver Table, ^rt("ad") in the Address Collection Driver Table Reference.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
294 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 295
Chapter 75
Subscriber Employer Branch Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Employer Branch data element is used to create a field that allows the subscriber's employer branch to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Employer Branch data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Employer Branch data element:
None
Variations The Subscriber Employer Branch data element consists of the following variations:
Free-Text Only – This variation indicates to the System that the entry will be free-text. The System does not display any Branch Options for selection. The following field displays for the Free-Text Only variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierStandard – This variation indicates to the System that the entry will be either free-text or a selection from the Branch Options. The System displays a list of Branch Options for selection as well as prompts for free-text to be entered. The following field displays for the Standard variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
296 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce the field that has been created from the Subscriber Employer Branch data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, either prompts for an employer branch, a partial name, or free-text to be entered. Branch Options are defined in the Employer Table, ^rt("em").
When no entry is made into the field created from the Subscriber Employer data element, QuadraMed CPR stars out ( ** ) this field, making it inaccessible. When a Branch Option is selected, the System automatically fills in the following data element fields with branch information, provided the information is defined in the Employer Table, ^rt("em"), Branch level:
Subscriber Employer Address
Subscriber Employer Contact
Subscriber Employer Telephone
When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Employer Branch data element into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible. When the same as guarantor processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ̂ rt("rsg"), Employer Branch data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
When the other subscriber processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Employer Branch data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
Chapter 75 Subscriber Employer Branch Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 297
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Message Modifier (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
298 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 299
Chapter 76
Subscriber Employer Comment Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Employer Comment data element is used to create a field that allows a free-text comment about the subscriber's employer to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Employer Comment data element is accessed, the System prompts for a comment to be entered. When no entry is made into the field created from the Subscriber Employer data element, QuadraMed CPR stars out ( ** ) this field, making it inaccessible.
When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Employer Comment data element into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Employer Comment data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Employer Comment data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
300 QuadraMed Corporation
When the same as guarantor processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Employer Comment data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
When the other subscriber processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Employer Comment data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 301
Chapter 77
Subscriber Employer Contact Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Employer Contact data element is used to create a field that allows the subscriber's employer contact to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Employer Contact data element is accessed, the System prompts for a contact to be entered. When no entry is made into the field created from the Subscriber Employer data element, QuadraMed CPR stars out ( ** ) this field, making it inaccessible.
When the Subscriber Employer data element is defined, this data element field can be defined as follows:
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Employer Contact data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Employer Contact data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
302 QuadraMed Corporation
Automatically filled-in by the System when the information for the Subscriber Employer data element is selected from the Employer Table, ^rt("em"). When the contact is defined in the Employer Table, ^rt("em"), Employer level, Contact Name field, the System defaults the subscriber employer contact into this field.
Automatically filled-in by the System when the information for the Subscriber Branch data element is selected from the Employer Table, ^rt("em"). When the contact is defined in the Employer Table, ^rt("em"), Branch level, Contact Name field, the System defaults the subscriber employer contact into this field.
Free-text entry of the contact.
When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Employer Contact data element into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible. When the same as guarantor processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Employer Contact data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited. When the other subscriber processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Employer Contact data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 303
Chapter 78
Subscriber Employer Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Employer data element is used to create a field that allows the subscriber's employer to be entered during the insurance process.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Employer data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Employer data element:
None
Variations The Subscriber Employer data element consists of the following variations:
Free-Text Only – This variation indicates to the System that the entry will be free-text. The System does not display any Employer Options for selection. The following fields display for the Free-Text Only variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierLengthStandard – This variation indicates to the System that the entry will be either free-text or a selection from the Employer Options. The System displays a list of Employer Options for selection as well as prompts for free-text to be entered. The following fields display for the Standard variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierLengthAddress Display
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
304 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Employer data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, either prompts for an employer, a partial name, or free-text to be entered. Entry of a partial name causes the System to display a list of Employer Options. Employer Options are defined in the Employer Table, ^rt("em").
The Subscriber Employer data element is starred out ( ** ), making it inaccessible, until the Subscriber Employment Status data element field is defined as active. An employment status is considered active when the Employment Status Table, ^rt("ems"), Active Employment? field is defined as yes for the selected employment status option.
The following data element fields are starred out ( ** ), making them inaccessible, until the Subscriber Employer data element is defined:
Subscriber Employee ID
Subscriber Employer Address
Subscriber Employer Branch
Subscriber Employer Comment
Subscriber Employer Contact
Subscriber Employer Telephone
When an Employer Option is selected from the Employer Table, ^rt("em"), the System automatically fills in the following data element fields, provided the information is defined in the Employer Table, ^rt("em"):
Subscriber Employer Address
Subscriber Employer Contact
Subscriber Employer Telephone
When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Employer data element into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible.
When the same as guarantor processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Employer data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
When the other subscriber processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Employer data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
Chapter 78 Subscriber Employer Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 305
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Address Display
Purpose Defines the address that displays in the Subscriber Employer Address data element field.
Input (L) Location Address
(B) Billing Address
Defaults to location address
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
306 QuadraMed Corporation
System Use (L) Location Address – The System displays the information defined in the Employer Table, ^rt("em"), Employer level, Address field, as the subscriber employer's address.
(B) Billing Address – The System displays the information defined in the Employer Table, ^rt("em"), Employer level, Billing Address field, as the subscriber employer's address.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Address Display (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 307
Chapter 79
Subscriber Employer Telephone Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Employer Telephone data element is used to create a field that allows the subscriber's employer telephone number to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Employer Telephone data element is accessed, the System prompts for the telephone number to be entered. QuadraMed CPR accepts standard telephone formats.
When no entry is made into the field created from the Subscriber Employer data element, QuadraMed CPR stars out ( ** ) this field, making it inaccessible.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Employer Telephone data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Employer Telephone data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
308 QuadraMed Corporation
When the Subscriber Employer data element is defined, this field can be defined as follows:
Automatically filled-in by the System when the information for the Subscriber Employer data element is selected from the Employer Table, ^rt("em"). When the telephone number is defined in the Employer Table, ^rt("em"), Employer level, Telephone field, the System defaults the subscriber employer telephone number into this field.
Automatically filled-in by the System when the information for the Subscriber Branch data element is selected from the Employer Table, ^rt("em"). When the telephone number is defined in the Employer Table, ^rt("em"), Branch level, Telephone field, the System defaults the branch telephone number into this field. The branch telephone number overrides the Employer level, Telephone field.
Free-text entry of the telephone number.
When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Employer Telephone data element into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible. When the same as guarantor processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Employer Telephone data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited. When the other subscriber processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Employer Telephone data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 309
Chapter 80
Subscriber Employment Status Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Employment Status data element is used to create a field that allows the employment status of the subscriber to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Employment Status data element is accessed, the System displays a list of Employment Status Options and prompts for one to be selected. Employment Status Options are defined in the Employment Status Table, ^rt("ems").
When an option is selected that is not considered an active employment status, QuadraMed CPR stars out (**) the following data element fields, making them inaccessible:
Subscriber Employee ID
Subscriber Employer
Subscriber Employer Address
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Employer Status data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Employer Status data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
310 QuadraMed Corporation
Subscriber Employer Branch
Subscriber Employer Comment
Subscriber Employer Contact
Subscriber Employer Telephone
An employment status option is considered active when the Employment Status Table, ^rt("ems"), Active Employment? field is defined as yes.
When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Employment Status data element into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible. When the same as guarantor processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Employment Status data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited. When the other subscriber processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Employment Status data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 311
Chapter 81
Subscriber Home Telephone Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Home Telephone data element is used to create a field that allows the subscriber's home telephone number to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Employer Telephone data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Employer Telephone data element:
None
Variations The Subscriber Home Telephone data element consists of the following variations:
None Option – This variation operates the same as the Standard variation with the addition of or Choose none (N) as a processing option in the transaction line. The following field displays for the None Option variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierStandard – This variation allows standard telephone formats to be entered. For a complete description of standard telephone formats, see Chapter 4, Standard Data Elements in the Introduction to CPR Tables. The following field displays for the Standard variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
312 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Home Telephone data element is accessed, the System prompts for a telephone number to be entered. When the None Option variation is used, the System also prompts, as part of the transaction line, or Choose none(N). QuadraMed CPR accepts standard telephone formats.
When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Home Telephone data element into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible. When the same as guarantor processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Home Telephone data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited. When the other subscriber processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Home Telephone data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 313
Chapter 82
Subscriber Name Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Name data element is used to create a field that allows the name of the person holding the insurance policy to be identified.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM the Subscriber Name data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO the Subscriber Name data element:
None
Required Status The required status for this data element is database-defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ̂ rt("ipp"), Data Element Definition Screen, Required? field, as well as in the Required Expr Expressions field.
NOTE: When both the Required? field and a required expression are defined, the System uses the most restrictive required status.
Variations The Subscriber Name data element consists of the following variations:
Name without suffix – This variation does not display the Family Suffix Options during data entry. The following fields display for the Name without suffix variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierGuarantor ModifierGuarantor Modifier CharacterSame As Data To ExcludeLengthStandard – This variation displays the list of Family Suffix Options when the subscriber name is being defined. The following fields display for the Standard variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierGuarantor Modifier
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
314 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Name data element is accessed, the System prompts for a name to be entered, or to choose same as patient, guarantor, or other subscriber. When a name is entered, it must be entered in the standard person format (i.e., Last,First M). Depending on the variation selected, after the name is entered, the System can display a list of Family Suffix Options. Family Suffix Options are defined in the Family Suffix Table, ^rt("fs").
When the same as patient processing option is chosen, the System defaults the following Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), patient data element information into the corresponding Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), subscriber data element.
Guarantor Modifier CharacterSame As Data To ExcludeLength
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
REGISTRATION SCREEN SEQUENCE TABLE, ^RT("RS"), DATA ELEMENT
INSURANCE/PAYOR PROFILE TABLE, ^RT("IPP"), DATA ELEMENT
Employer Subscriber Employer
Employer Address Subscriber Employer Address
Employer Branch Subscriber Employer Branch
Employer Comment Subscriber Employer Comment
Employer Contact Subscriber Employer Contact
Employer Telephone Subscriber Employer Telephone
Patient Name Subscriber Name
Patient Address Subscriber Address
Patient Birthdate Subscriber Birthdate
Patient Day Telephone Subscriber Day Telephone
Patient Driver's License Subscriber Driver's License
Patient Employee ID Subscriber Employee ID
Patient Employment Status Subscriber Employment Status
Patient Home Telephone Subscriber Home Telephone
Patient Occupation Subscriber Occupation
Chapter 82 Subscriber Name Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 315
When the same as <guarantor modifier> processing option is chosen, the System defaults the following Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), guarantor data element information into the corresponding Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), subscriber data element.
Patient Sex Subscriber Sex
Patient Social Security # Subscriber Social Security Number
After the System defaults the patient information into the corresponding subscriber data element field, the System stars out ( ** ) all fields created from the subscriber data elements, except the Subscriber Name data element, making them inaccessible.
GUARANTOR SCREEN SEQUENCE TABLE,^RT("RSG"), DATA ELEMENT
INSURANCE/PAYOR PROFILE TABLE, ^RT("IPP"), DATA ELEMENT
Name Subscriber Name
Address Subscriber Address
Birthdate Subscriber Birthdate
Day Telephone Subscriber Day Telephone
Driver's License Subscriber Driver's License
Employee ID Subscriber Employee ID
Employer Subscriber Employer
Employer Address Subscriber Employer Address
Employer Branch Subscriber Employer Branch
Employer Comment Subscriber Employer Comment
Employer Contact Subscriber Employer Contact
Employer Telephone Subscriber Employer Telephone
Employment Status Subscriber Employment Status
Home Telephone Subscriber Home Telephone
Occupation Subscriber Occupation
Relationship Subscriber Relationship
Sex Subscriber Sex
Social Security # Subscriber Social Security Number
REGISTRATION SCREEN SEQUENCE TABLE, ^RT("RS"), DATA ELEMENT
INSURANCE/PAYOR PROFILE TABLE, ^RT("IPP"), DATA ELEMENT
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
316 QuadraMed Corporation
When the other subscriber processing option is chosen, the System displays a list of Other Subscriber Options and prompts for one to be selected. When more than one insurance is defined for a visit, the System displays the subscribers defined for those other insurances as Other Subscriber Options. When an other subscriber is chosen, the System defaults all the other subscriber information into the corresponding data element fields. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
When the field created from the Visit Type Table, ^rt("vt"), Guarantor data element is defined as same as patient employer, the System suppresses the same as patient guarantor processing option from displaying in this data element field.
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Guarantor Modifier
Purpose Defines the transaction line option that allows the default of guarantor data as subscriber data.
Input Free-text
Greater than 15 characters is impractical for display purposes.
Required
System Use Displays this text as part of the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Chapter 82 Subscriber Name Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 317
Guarantor Modifier Character
Purpose Defines the character that is associated with the guarantor modifier.
Input Free-text
1 character limit
Required
System Use Displays this character on the transaction line, in parentheses, after the text defined in the Guarantor Modifier Constants field.
For example, if the Guarantor Modifier Constants field is defined as guarantor and this Constants field is defined as g, the transaction line would display Choose guarantor(g).
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Same As Data To Exclude
Purpose Defines which data elements are not to be copied when the field created from the this data element is defined as same as patient.
Input Multiple selection from the following hard-coded options:
Address
Birthdate
Day Telephone Number
Death Date/Time
Driver's License
Employee ID
Employer
Employer Address
Employer Branch
Employer Comment
Employer Contact
Employer Telephone Number
Employment Status
Home Telephone Number
Mailing Address
Name
Occupation
Relationship
Sex
Social Security Number
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
318 QuadraMed Corporation
ExpressionsThe following fields display when the Expressions field is accessed:
System Use Excludes the selected options from being copied when the field created from this data element is defined as same as patient.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
FIELD DESCRIPTION
Default Expr Defines an expression that determines a predefined value entered into the data element field.
Edit Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field can be edited by the user.
Display Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field can be accessed on the screen driver on the user's side. When display security fails, the selection number and data for the field are starred out.
Allowed Security Expr Defines an expression that determines whether data can be entered into the data element field. When allowed security fails, the field cannot be accessed and the System clears any defined data in the field.
Required Expr Defines an expression that determines whether the data element field is required.
Same As Data To Exclude (Continued)
QuadraMed Corporation 319
Chapter 83
Subscriber Occupation Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Occupation data element is used to create a field that allows the subscriber's occupation to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element AttributesData Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Occupation data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Occupation data element:
None
Variations The Subscriber Occupation data element consists of the following variations:
Free-Text Only – This variation indicates to the System that the entry is free-text. The following fields display for the Free-Text Only variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierLengthStandard – This variation indicates to the System that the entry is either free-text or a selection from the Occupation Options. The following fields display for the Standard variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message ModifierLength
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
320 QuadraMed Corporation
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Occupation data element is accessed, the System, depending on the variation selected, either prompts for the entry of a partial name or an occupation.
When a partial name is entered, the System displays a list of matching Occupation Options and prompts for one to be selected, or for free-text to be entered. Occupation Options are defined in the Occupation Table, ^rt("oc"). When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Occupation data element into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible.
When the same as guarantor processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Occupation data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited. When the other subscriber processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Occupation data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following fields display when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Length
Purpose Defines the maximum number of characters that can be entered into this field.
Input Integer
Chapter 83 Subscriber Occupation Data Element
QuadraMed Corporation 321
System Use When defined, the System places the end of line symbol (|) at the end of the data element field input area to mark the maximum number of characters that can be entered.
When left blank, there is no limit for entering characters into the data element field.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
Length (Continued)
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
322 QuadraMed Corporation
QuadraMed Corporation 323
Chapter 84
Subscriber Relationship Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Relationship data element is used to create a field that allows the entry of the subscriber's relationship to the patient during insurance processing.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Relationship data element is accessed, the System displays a list of Relationship Options and prompts for one to be selected. Relationship Options are defined in the Relationship Table, ^rt("rl").
When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults self into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Relationship data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Relationship data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
324 QuadraMed Corporation
When the same as guarantor processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Relationship data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited. When the other subscriber processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Relationship data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 325
Chapter 85
Subscriber Sex Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Sex data element is used to create a field that allows the subscriber's sex to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Sex data element is accessed, the System prompts for the subscriber's sex to be chosen (i.e., M Male, F Female, or U Unknown).
When the same as patient(P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Sex data element into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible. When the same as guarantor processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Sex data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Sex data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Sex data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
326 QuadraMed Corporation
When the other subscriber processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Sex data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 327
Chapter 86
Subscriber Social Security Number Data Element
OverviewThe Subscriber Social Security Number data element is used to create a field that allows the subscriber's social security number to be entered during insurance processing.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Subscriber Social Security Number data element is accessed, the System prompts for the subscriber's social security number to be entered. The format of the social security number is hard-coded (that is, 999-99-9999).
When the same as patient (P) processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Registration Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rs"), Patient Social Security Number data element into this data element field. After the System defaults this information, the System stars out ( ** ) this data element field, making it inaccessible.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Subscriber Social Security Number data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Subscriber Social Security Number data element:
None
Variations None
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
328 QuadraMed Corporation
When the same as guarantor processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Guarantor Screen Sequence Table, ^rt("rsg"), Social Security Number data element into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited. When the other subscriber processing option is chosen while defining the subscriber name, the System defaults the information defined in the Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp"), Subscriber Social Security Number data element for the other subscriber into this data element field. This information can be accepted or edited.
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 329
Chapter 87
Telephone Data Element
OverviewThe Telephone data element is used to create a field that allows the insurance/payor telephone number to be defined.
Data Element Attributes
DescriptionOnce a field that has been created from the Telephone data element is accessed, the System automatically defaults the telephone number defined in the Insurance/Payor Table, ^rt("ip"), Telephone field.
Data Element Relationship
Links TO other Tables FROM Telephone data element:
Insurance/Payor Profile Table, ^rt("ipp")
Links FROM other Tables TO Telephone data element:
None
Variations The Telephone data element consists of the following variations:
Display Only – This variation indicates the telephone number is a display only field. The information that displays cannot be edited. There are no constants defined for this data element.
Entered – This variation allows standard telephone formats to be entered. For a complete description of standard telephone formats, see Chapter 4, Standard Data Elements in the Introduction to CPR Tables. The following field displays for the Entered variation when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Rebuilding Screens Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
330 QuadraMed Corporation
When this data element field is defined with the Display Only variation, the field created from this data element cannot be edited. When this data element field is defined with the Entered variation, the default information can be accepted or edited. QuadraMed CPR accepts standard telephone formats.
ConstantsThe following field displays when the Constants field is accessed:
Message Modifier
Purpose Defines the text that displays as the transaction line when this data element field is accessed. In some instances, the message modifier also provides a header to a selection list.
Input Free-text
Greater than 40 characters is impractical for display purposes
Required
System Use Displays this text as the transaction line when the field created from this data element is accessed.
Impact ofChange
Changes are not reflected on the user's side until the screen containing the data element is rebuilt.
QuadraMed Corporation 331
Index of Selected Fields
AAdditional Generated Data String 160Additional Object Data String 159Address Collection Screen 13, 169, 274, 293Address Display 305Allow Annotation? 157Allow Approximate? 126Allow Duplicate Secondary Number(s)? 252Allow Edit of Secondary Number(s)? 253Allow Free-Text? 176, 181Allow Partial Name? 181Allowed Security Expr 8, 161, 171, 182, 215, 318
CCard Capture Parameters 264Card Location 265Card Reader Parameters 264Check Digit Type 137Choose Values 121City Length 275Country 276Country Length 276County Length 275
DDays In Future 37, 41, 45, 49, 59, 64, 67, 71, 207, 211Days In Past 37, 41, 45, 49, 59, 63, 67, 71, 207, 211Display Format 156Display Format(s) 79, 83, 87, 91, 95, 99, 103, 107, 111,
115, 136, 187, 219, 225, 234, 289Display Maximum Length 79, 83, 87, 91, 95, 99, 103,
107, 111, 115, 136, 188, 220, 226, 234, 290Display Name 267Display Security Expr 7, 161, 170, 182, 214, 254, 318Display Text 17, 55, 192, 239, 243Display Type 79, 83, 87, 91, 95, 99, 103, 107, 111,
115, 131, 136, 187, 219, 225, 233, 289
EEdit Security Expr 7, 161, 170, 182, 214, 253, 318Effective Date 1 63Employee Type(s) 131
FField Delimiter 264Format(s) 267
GGuarantor Modifier 316Guarantor Modifier Character 317
HHard-Coded Values 144High Range 235
IImage Print Size 161Initial Annotation Tool 157Ins/Payor DE Pointer 265Interface 263
LLow Range 235
MMailing Code Length 277Manual Number Entry 253Message Modifier 12, 17, 20, 23, 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 37,
41, 45, 49, 52, 55, 59, 63, 67, 71, 74, 76, 78, 82, 86, 90, 94, 98, 102, 106, 110, 114, 118, 126, 130, 135, 140, 144, 164, 169, 174, 179, 184, 186, 191, 194, 196, 198, 200, 202, 204, 207, 211, 214, 218, 222, 224, 229, 233, 239, 243, 246, 248, 251, 271, 274,
QuadraMed® CPR Insurance Payor Profile Table Reference
332 QuadraMed Corporation
284, 286, 288, 292, 296, 300, 302, 305, 308, 310, 312, 316, 320, 324, 326, 328, 330
Multimedia Catalogue Object(s) 156Multimedia Definition 153Multimedia Rubber Stamp(s) 158Multimedia Server Type(s) 154Multimedia Type 153Multi-Select? 175, 180
OOverride Previous Data? 266
PProfile Name 3Profile Short Name 3Prompt 16, 54, 120, 190, 228, 238, 242
RRequired Expr 8, 161, 171, 182, 215, 254, 318Required Status 267Revision List iii
SSame As Data To Exclude 317Screen Name 4Screen Type/Name 174Secondary Number Type/Secondary Number
Type(s) 252Selection Group 179Selection Table 179State Length 276Storage Reference 122, 126, 131, 138, 141, 145, 152,
165, 169, 182, 184Storage Reference (Continued) 176Street Address Length 275Suppress Printing? 160
TTimeout Management Queue(s) 262
UUse Partial Name Match? 170
VValues 17, 55, 191, 229, 239, 243Verification Expression 80, 84, 88, 92, 96, 100, 104,
108, 112, 116, 138, 188, 220, 226, 235, 290Verification Start Method 263
WWindow Preference 175, 180
top related